JP2021142079A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing game amusement.SOLUTION: For a slot machine 10, an AT mode is set in which a push order notification for notifying a player of an operation order of stop switches 42 to 44 may be generated. In the AT mode, when 18 games are set as one set and a continuation condition is satisfied, the set is updated and the next set is started. On an auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, a pseudo-set performance is executed in which the number of games which is less than the number of games in one set of the AT mode is set as one set. When a third specific performance is generated in the pseudo-set performance, the pseudo-set performance of the next set is started, regardless of the number of games remaining in the set in the pseudo-set performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated while a medal as a game medium is bet on the slot machine, an internal lottery is carried out, the reel starts to rotate, and the reel stops during the rotation. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the gaming machines illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The present invention
A game progressing means for advancing a game with the game starting based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ending based on a predetermined end condition as one game.
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player in a game progressed by the game progress means, and a lottery means for giving a privilege to the player.
A privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player according to a lottery result by the lottery means and a result of a game advanced by the game progress means, and a privilege giving means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
The advantageous state is configured so that a specific number or more of games can be executed as a unit state, and when the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, after the execution of the unit state, the game shifts to the next unit state. If the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed.
In the advantageous state, a special number of games less than the specific number is set as one unit notification state, and if the notification continuation condition of the unit notification state is satisfied, after the end of the unit notification state, the next On the other hand, if the continuation condition for notification is not satisfied, the notification control means that does not start the next unit notification state after the end of the unit notification state, and
When the continuation condition for notification in the unit notification state is satisfied, the specific notification means for executing the predetermined specific notification in the unit notification state and the specific notification means.
When the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit notification state. The means to make it possible and
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 2 bets. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop switch, and the winning mode which is established. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a bonus state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relation of each state. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section transition lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of various transition lottery tables. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT addition. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of an instruction monitor and a section indicator. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the push order notification effect performed in the auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for precursor mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection rate of the continuation rate of AT mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for CZ mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT mode. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stops. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the AT effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific effect setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of a confrontation production. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of a battle production. It is a figure which shows an example of a specific effect table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the occurrence of a specific effect and the presence / absence of continuation of the AT mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the continuation rate of AT mode and the occurrence timing of a specific effect. It is a flowchart which shows the AT effect setting process in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the specific effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for adding AT in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the specific effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the AT effect setting process in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect setting process in the modification 4. It is a figure which shows an example of a suggestion effect table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by the auxiliary display part in the modification 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the AT effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the standby effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd specific effect table. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of production in AT mode in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for precursor mode. It is a flowchart which shows the AT effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd specific effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd specific effect table. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the AT mode set and the pseudo set. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd specific effect setting process in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd specific effect table at the time of update. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd specific effect setting process in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows an example of the ending game number table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd specific effect table in the modification 3. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the continuation rate of AT mode and a pseudo set. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of production in AT mode in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the AT effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th specific effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot production game number setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot production game number table and the adjustment game number table. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of production of the AT mode final set.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment when applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is a front view. A rear view of the door 12 and FIG. 5 are front views of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached by hitting a nail against a so-called island facility at the time of installation in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front opening side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so as not to be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured so that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving, for example, a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 shifts the angular positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 25 pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that is visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main control device 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used for explanation.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the first on the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L), and a "red 7" symbol (for example, the 14th on the left reel 32L). "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "white 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, 18th on left reel 32L), "Akakai" symbol (for example, 4th on left reel 32L), "Shirakai" symbol (for example, left) There are 10 types of reel 32L (19th). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reels can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified by using a combination of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R among the visible symbols. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are connected. The combination of each symbol that stops on the upper line L1, the combination of each symbol that stops on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. There is a combination of each symbol that stops at the lower line L3. In addition, the combination of the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the symbols that stop at the lower right line L4 connecting the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of symbols and symbols that stop at the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of each symbol that stops at the bending line L6 connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that become a straight line when the symbols are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which a bending occurs in the middle when the symbols are arranged. It should be noted that there are other combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, other than the bending line L6, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, when a line that is activated by a medal bet and a line that is not activated are set and the symbols are stopped on the activated line, that is, the valid line in a predetermined combination, As a result of winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which is a game medium, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the prize will not be established and the above benefits will not be granted.

In the slot machine 10, of the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, there are cases where three medals are bet and the game is started, and cases where two medals are bet and the game is started. When a medal is bet and the game is started, only the bending line L6 is set as an effective line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as an effective line. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. Further, in the following, a game in which three medals are bet and started is a three-bet game, a game in which two medals are bet and started is a two-bet game, and one medal is bet and started. The game is also called a one-bet game. In this embodiment, the 1-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be won and a privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination for which medals are paid out includes the first small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first small winning combination is won. If the first small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when the symbols corresponding to the first small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the right-down line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established.

If the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second small winning combination is won. If the second small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11B, when the symbols corresponding to the second small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the small winning combination is different from the above first small winning combination due to the difference in the line where the "bell" symbols are aligned. It is also possible to understand that is established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the third small It will be a winning role. If the third small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (c), when the symbols corresponding to the third small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination are awarded. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from the above has been established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fourth small winning combination is won. If the fourth small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11D, when the symbols corresponding to the fourth small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the “bell” symbols are aligned and stopped on the upward-sloping line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned first small winning combination to third small winning combination winning It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from the above has been established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth small winning combination is won. If the fifth small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines in which the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 4th small winning combination are awarded. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from the above has been established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the sixth small winning combination is won. If the sixth small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbol is placed on the lower row of the left reel 32L, the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the lower row of the right reel 32R, respectively. Stops (stops in a mound shape). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the stop position of the "bell" symbol, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 5th small winning combination winning. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from the above has been established.

Left reel 32L "bell" symbol, middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "Akakai" symbol or "youth" symbol, right reel 32R "white 7" symbol, "white shell" If the symbol or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML, the 7th small winning combination will be won. If the 7th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12A, when the symbols corresponding to the 7th small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the “watermelon” symbols are aligned and stopped on the downward-sloping line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth small winning combination is won. If the 8th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the symbols corresponding to the eighth small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination is different from the above 7th small winning combination due to the difference in the line where the "watermelon" symbols are aligned. It is also possible to understand that is established.

The 9th to 32nd small roles are mainly so-called missing roles in which a prize is established when the 1st to 6th small roles are missed. When the 9th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small roles are the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol or "bell" on the left reel 32L. Designs and medium reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "red shell" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " "Bell" or "white shell" design and right reel 32R "red 7" design, "white 7" design, "white shell" design, "youth" design, "watermelon" design, "red shell" design, "BAR" The winning is established when the corresponding combination of the symbol or the "replay" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the 9th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination are all stopped with the "bell" symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no small winning combination, and it is easy to understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the configuration in which medals are paid out based on the above-mentioned first small winning combination to 32nd small winning combination, the paid out small winning combination is a kind of privilege (game value) given according to the result of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as a payout rate, and the ratio of the number of payout medals (payouts) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as a payout rate. In some cases.

There are 1st re-game prize to 12th re-game prize as prizes to which the privilege (game value) of the re-game that enables the game of the next game to be performed without inserting a medal is given. As shown in FIG. 10, a winning symbol combination is set for each of the first re-game to the twelfth re-game.

The first replay is the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol or "youth" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol and the symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay winning are stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay prize corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, a prize is won when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. To establish. When the symbols corresponding to the second re-game winning are stopped on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 13 (e), the "white 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

In the third replay, a prize is won when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. To establish. When the symbol corresponding to the third re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 13 (f), the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel. The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle of 32R.

The fourth re-game and the fifth re-game are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games are won in duplicate.

The sixth replay is the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "cherry" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol, or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

In the 7th replay, the left reel 32L "bell" symbol, the middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "Akakai" symbol or "youth" symbol, and the right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol Alternatively, a prize is established when the "Akakai" symbol and the "Akakai" symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (e), when the symbol corresponding to the 7th re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R, while being in the middle. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the 7th re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

The eighth replay is the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "Akakai" symbol or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. And, the prize is established when stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 13A, when the symbols corresponding to the 8th re-game winning are stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

In the ninth replay, when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "Akakai" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. The prize is established. As shown in FIG. 13B, when the symbol corresponding to the 9th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right side. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called middle stage replay tempai is stopped.

In the 10th replay, the left reel 32L "BAR" symbol, the middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "Akakai" symbol or "youth" symbol, and the right reel 32R The prize is established when the "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Shirakai" symbol or "Youth" symbol stop on the effective line ML. In the 12th replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "Akakai" symbol on the right reel 32R are effective. A prize is established when the player stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13 (c) and 13 (d), when the symbol corresponding to the 10th re-game prize or the 12th re-game prize is stopped on the effective line ML, a "cherry" symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. If you have won the 10th re-game or the 12th re-game, if you aim at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R and perform a stop operation, the "cherry" symbol will stop in the upper row in the case of the 10th re-game winning. However, in the case of the 12th re-game prize, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower stage, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game prize and the 12th re-game prize. In the eleventh re-game, a prize is established when the tenth re-game and the twelfth re-game cannot be won, that is, when a omission may occur.

There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as state transition prizes in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first BB prize is awarded. When the first BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the first BB state. When the symbol corresponding to the first BB prize is stopped on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), the "BAR" symbols are aligned on the upward-sloping line L5 and stopped, or as shown in FIG. 14 (b). , The "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol stop in order from the left on the upward-sloping line L5.

If the "Akakai" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second BB prize is awarded. When the second BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the second BB state. When the symbol corresponding to the second BB prize stops on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 14 (c), the "white 7" symbol is aligned on the lower line L3 and stops, or as shown in FIG. 14 (d). , The "white 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol stop in order from the left on the lower line L3.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means that is operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start the variable display of the symbol. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and the main control device 101 described later are connected to each other. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the LOW signal detection signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated by operating the stop switches 42 to 44. The detection signal switches from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the symbol based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

The stop switches 42 to 44 have built-in stop lamps 42b to 44b, respectively. The light from the stop lamps 42b to 44b partially passes through the operation surface of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the light from the stop lamps 42b to 44b becomes visible through the stop switches 42 to 44. Then, when the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is valid, the lighting of the stop lamps 42b to 44b is controlled, and when the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is invalid, the corresponding stop lamps 42b to 44b are turned on. Are controlled to be turned off.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, paying attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges medals to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for medal payout (not shown), and pays out medals to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent medals exceeding a predetermined amount from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as a game medium at a time. Is provided. The specific number of sheets is set according to the progress of the game. For example, if the specified number of games is set to 3 and the specific number is set to 3, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 3 virtual medals are provided on condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number of cards is set to 2 and the specified number of cards is set to 2, two cards are inserted on condition that there are credits. When the virtual medal is inserted and the specified number of medals is set to 3 or 2, and the specific number is set to 3, the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. The first is when three virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there is a credit, the specified number is set as three or two, and the specific number is set as two. When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on condition that there are credits. Further, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, note that while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 merely involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. The slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch because one virtual medal is inserted.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operation surface operated by the player than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operability than the second credit insertion switch 57. Better than. Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. That is, normally, it is considered that the game is played by throwing in a set specific number of the specified number of sheets.

An effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect is generated is provided on the right side of the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57.

A checkout switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement switch 59 is operated in the stored and stored state, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal outlet 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game medium.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and the number of remaining medals that display the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the BB state. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided, respectively. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, on the right side of the payout number display unit 62, there is a push order indicator that notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a push order indicator that notifies the operation order. An instruction monitor 68 is provided, which includes a section indicator for changing the winning rate of the small winning combination and indicating an advantageous section which is a section in which the game can proceed in a situation advantageous to the player. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

On the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game by each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be due to the main display unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is used. It is called an auxiliary display unit 65. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided.

In the front door 12, below the gaming panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, a model name of the gaming machine is described, and a lower display unit 69 constituting a predetermined display screen is provided. There is. The lower display unit 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display unit, the lower display unit 69 may be provided with an operation button for effect, or the entire lower display unit 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside, and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is for a hole manager or the like to adjust the output of medals. That is, the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by the hall manager or the like inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and operating the ON operation. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

The main control device 101 is provided with a combination ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a state that is not. The main control device 77 is visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12, and is invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. The 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the gaming machine, and more specifically, in the board box so that the display surface of the role ratio monitor 77 can be visually recognized via the board box in which the main control device 101 is housed. It is contained. By the way, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 is invisible even from the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21. Unless the front door 12 is opened, it is impossible to check the role ratio monitor 77. The combination monitor 77 will be described in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has made one rotation), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion port 45, and medals to be paid out from the hopper device 51. The payout detection sensor 51a, the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the settlement switch 59. Settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of, reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned on, etc. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10, including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volt in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply is cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volt, for example. It is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure process described later. Further, the power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this regulated voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are inserted. It is connected via the output port 104.

The CPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits required in the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. A main memory as a storage means is configured by the ROM 105 and the RAM 106, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the set value, the set value information storage area 106c for storing the set value, and the like, a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by a power failure process (see FIG. 17), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured so that a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Then, when the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181 and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 or the like for securing is built-in.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), a main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and stop lamps 42b to 44b, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display are connected to the output side. The unit 65 is connected. Then, the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the display control device 81 is a sub-base that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main base that controls and manages the game. That is, the burden on the main board is reduced by providing a sub board for voices, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) or the like is connected to the input side of the display control device 81. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Further, all or part of the configurations 42b to 44b and 63 to 65 connected to the display control device 81 are directly connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 is configured to have these configurations 42b to 44b. , 63 to 65 may be configured to directly control all or part of the above.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of. In the following, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

Here, the outline of the power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored to end the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the timer interrupt processing is restored. If the power failure signal is continuously output, it goes into an infinite loop as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the insertion medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether the reading result is normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the number. In step S108, a timer update process is performed in which the values of each counter and timer are subtracted / added. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to the display units 60 to 62, 68, and the segment data display process for displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like is performed. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of the registers saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. After that, in step S115, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, a normal process for performing main control related to the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S201, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the display control device 81 or the like waits until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. After that, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, for example, when a re-game prize is established in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and when a re-game prize is established in a two-bet game, two medals are automatically inserted. Performs the process of automatically inserting the virtual medal of.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any of the re-game prizes is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals possessed and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings is established, the sensor abnormality confirmation process for confirming whether or not an error has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process (step S107) of the timer interrupt process is performed. If an error occurs, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 is operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do.

Whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or the settlement switch 59 is not operated. If any of these is performed, the medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bets has reached the specified number. In the slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number of sheets in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified number of sheets in the gaming state other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, the affirmative judgment is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and the condition that the number of bets is "2" or "3" except in the bonus state. In step S205, an affirmative determination is made. In other words, in the game state other than the bonus state, if the medal is not bet, or if the bet number is "1" even if the medal is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

When the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a control device on the sub side in step S206. Set as the output target of. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt processing. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes a process for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied and notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64 And the auxiliary display unit 65 are controlled.

After executing the process of step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a predetermined number of medals are bet, so that the game is started in order to start the game. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, the effective line setting process for setting the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the effective line is performed in step S208. That is, only the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process in step S210, the reel control process in step S211 and the medal payout process in step S212 are executed in this order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is selected. The slot machine 10 has a normal game state and a bonus state as game states, and a lottery table is set for each game state. Then, in the normal game state, since the specified number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above, the lottery table for the normal game state is the lottery table in the 3-bet game. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step S302, the lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the game state is selected. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and one of the bonus state flags is not set, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is selected. .. Then, when the current game is a 3-bet game, the lottery table for the normal gaming state (FIG. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 21). Further, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, the lottery table having the lowest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table having the highest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 6".

Here, the processing related to the setting of the winning probability will be supplementarily described.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after the initialization process of the RAM 106. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 for each operation of the start lever 41. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated once, "setting 1" → "setting 2" → Update the setting value so that "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Each set value is displayed on, for example, the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated every time the set value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off is set as the setting value confirmation operation, and the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is completed. do. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 also ends. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set value.

The lottery table will be briefly described. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for a normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 3-bet game. Further, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for a normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 2-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining the validity of the winning combination is set in the subsequent step S304. In such a determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial judgment value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is used as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. The judgment value is DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the index value IV. In the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV affirmed in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 23, the 7th small winning combination winning flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set in step S306. If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 26, in step S306. Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not the winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (the first BB winning flag) or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (the second BB winning flag), the winning flag storage area 106a The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on condition that the corresponding winning is established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in the state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the first BB and the second BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the winning combination other than the first BB and the second BB is set. If is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, when the first BB winning flag is carried over and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is not set. Further, in the state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, the 1st small winning combination winning flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, and the 10th small winning combination Set the winning combination flag and the 13th small winning combination flag.

A lottery table in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over is separately prepared, and when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. It may be configured to perform. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB and the second BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not it is correct, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of whether or not the winning combination is successful is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 20, that is, when the game is played in the 3-bet game in the normal gaming state, the probability of winning the normal lip A (when IV = 1). The probability of winning is about 1 / 27.3 in setting 1, about 1 / 27.5 in setting 3, and about 1 / 28.3 in setting 6, and the set values are The higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning the normal lip B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning the normal lip C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value. It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the chance A (the probability of winning when IV = 4) is about 1/164 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV = 5) The probability of winning is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. It is set so that the chance eye B is easier to win than the chance eye C, and the chance eye A is easier to win than the chance eye B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV = 7) is about 1/107 in setting 1, about 1/104 in setting 3, and about 93.6 in setting 6. It is a fraction, and it is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV = 8) is about 1/215 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 9). The probability of becoming) is about 1/13100 regardless of the set value, and is set so that Cherry B is easier to win than Cherry C and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. .. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle forward push bell 1, middle forward push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the pinch bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value. Regardless of this, each is about 1 / 18.4, and the probability of winning the push order bell is about 1 / 1.53. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the first BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other roles (replay, small role, IV = 1 to 1). It is set higher than the winning probability of 24). In the 3-bet game, it is set not to win the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) or the second BB (IV = 26) (0 is set in the corresponding point value PV). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any role including the first BB is 0. Then, in the situation where the first BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the first BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in the 3-bet game, excluding the increase in the first BB state, a decrease of about 1.77 medals per game can be expected (net increase number minus about 1.77).

On the other hand, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 21, that is, when the game is played in the 2-bet game in the normal game state, the normal lip A, the normal lip B, and the normal lip C , Chance A, Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 1-9) is played in the above 3-bet game. It is the same probability as the probability of the case. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. It is set to be. The push order bell (IV = 11-22) is set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1 of 257 regardless of the set value, and it is set so that it is harder to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. Has been done. In the 2-bet game, it is set so that the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Further, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV = 25) is set not to be won, while the second BB (IV = 26) is set to be won, and the probability is not related to the set value. It is about 1/4.95. Even in the 2-bet game, the probability of not winning any role including the second BB is 0. Then, in the situation where the second BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is about 1/4.95 (for the second BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in the 2-bet game, excluding the increase of the second BB, a decrease of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected (net increase number minus about 0.64).

After setting the winning flag in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that invalidates the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S310, the lottery result correspondence process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for whether or not to shift the game state according to the result of the lottery in steps S301 to S308, processing for notifying the push order combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, the lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process for setting a stoptable symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed based on the lottery result of this game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information according to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, the push order bell 1 is won (winned when IV = 11), and the 1st small winning combination flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, the 10th small winning combination winning flag, and the 13th small winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the first small combination, the ninth small combination, the tenth small combination, and the thirteenth small combination winning can be stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, when the watermelon is won (winning when IV = 23) and the 7th small winning combination flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set, the symbol corresponding to the 7th small winning combination winning and the 8th small winning combination winning. Set the stop symbol information so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped.

In the slot machine 10, the first BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 3-bet game, and the second BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 2-bet game. Therefore, even when the first BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 2-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 sets the stop symbol information for establishing the first BB prize. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the first BB prize is set). Further, even when the second BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 3-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 sets the stop symbol information for establishing the second BB prize. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the second BB winning is set).

In the following step S313, when a plurality of stoppable symbol information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles are won among the small roles, replays, and bonus roles, the priorities shown below are set. If the small winning combination and the bonus are won, the small winning combination is given priority, and if the small winning combination cannot be established, the bonus winning is established, and the priority is set. .. If the re-game and bonus are won, the priority is set so that the re-game prize is prioritized and established.

For example, in the situation where the 1st BB is won (the 1st BB winning flag is set and the 1st BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, and the 1st BB winning and the 7th small role winning and When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 8th small winning combination is set, the priority is set so that the 7th small winning combination and the 8th small winning combination are prioritized over the 1st BB winning. .. In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal Lip A is further won, the 2nd BB winning and the 1st replay are performed. , When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 2nd re-game, the 3rd re-game and the 4th re-game winning is set, priority is given so that each re-game winning is established with priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set the ranking.

Here, when the re-game is won, the combination of the winning symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will always win the prize. In other words, if the re-game is won, the re-game prize will always be established and no omission will occur. Therefore, when the stop symbol information between the re-game and the bonus is set, the re-game prize of any of the set re-games is always established, and the bonus prize is not established.

After executing the process of step S313, the section display first process is executed in step S314, and then the lottery process ends. The first section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the combination monitor 77, and such a process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, the rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect processing is for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309 and the result of the lottery result corresponding process performed in step S310. It is a process. In the following step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing this process, the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a predetermined number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start rotating immediately. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start process. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the CPU 102 outputs a progress (command) to that effect to the display control device 81, and the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side displays each stop switch 42. By lighting and displaying the stop lamps 42b to 44b built in the ~ 44, the player or the like is notified that the stop command can be generated.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel. The display control device 81 that has received the stop command command controls the effect of stopping the corresponding reel by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, and corresponds to the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time. The stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled to be turned off.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped is stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S407, any value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reel arrival symbol to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. In the slot machine 10, for example, when the player wins when IV = 11 to 22, that is, when the push order bell is won (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 that generates a stop command is generated. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of ~ 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established. For example, when the middle forward push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → When the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, the stop information is set so that the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination is established, and the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right. In that case, stop information is set so that the third small winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by a maximum of four symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the distance between the symbols of the same type is 4 or less on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning symbol is valid when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with respect to the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by 5 symbols or more, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right. In such a case, as described above, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination.

The 17th small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol and a "BAR" symbol. The 18th small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Akakai" symbol and a "Shirakai" symbol. The 21st small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol and a "youth" symbol. The 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the distance between the symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, any of the 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol is displayed on the effective line (middle stage) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In the slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop the symbols with a small number of sliding frames on the effective line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the fourth "Akakai" symbol (2) which is the 18th small winning combination symbol. Komasuberi) and the 5th "replay" symbol (3 reels), which is the 21st small role symbol, can be stopped in the middle row, but the 4th "Akakai" symbol with the smallest number of slip frames is in the middle row. The stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is still room for the 18th small winning combination, the 17th small winning combination and the 21st small winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th small winning combination symbol of the left reel 32L stops in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the 18th small winning combination winning can be established.

The 18th small winning combination symbol on the medium reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, in this case, the stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43.

The 18th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white shell" symbol and a "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol is 5 or more. That is, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th small role symbol "white shell" symbol or "youth" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and cases where it cannot be stopped in the upper row. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that can be stopped in the upper stage, the 18th small winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that cannot be stopped in the upper stage, so-called omission. It becomes.

Here, when the "Akakai" symbol stops at the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, the 18th small by winning the middle forward push bell 1 as described above. In addition to the case where the winning combination may be established, there is also the possibility that the 20th small winning combination may be established by winning the middle forward push bell 2. That is, as for the 20th small winning combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are common to the 18th small winning combination symbol. Then, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small role symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol, while the 20th small role symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol, which are different. ing. In particular, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small winning combination symbol and the 20th small winning combination symbol are the 20th small winning combination symbol when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 18th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line. Can not be stopped at the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 20th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line, the 18th small winning combination symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line. Each of these symbols is arranged in. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle forward push bell 1 is won or the middle forward push bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped and the 18th small winning combination is won. And even if the stop mode is such that there is a possibility of winning the 20th small winning combination, it is not possible to aim for the winning.

Next, a case where one middle forward push bell is won and each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated in the order of middle → left → right will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the third small winning combination prize.

On the middle reel 32M, the "replay" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "replay" symbol is stopped in the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "Akakai" symbol, which are the third small winning symbols, are arranged so that the distance between these symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "watermelon" symbol or the "ark shell" symbol stops in the upper row regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the third small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, when the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, the first small winning combination is won regardless of the operation timing. When 2 small winning combination, 3rd small winning combination, 4th small winning combination, 5th small winning combination, or 6th small winning combination is established and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the operation is performed. Depending on the operation timing, other small winning combination prizes will be established, or none of the small winning combination winnings will be established and will be missed. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, the 1st small role prize, the 2nd small role prize, the 3rd small role prize, the 4th small role prize, the 5th small role prize , Or the 6th small winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are lined up on the valid line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the effective line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a prize is established on the effective line is determined. judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the bonus state process is executed in step S414. The bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state processing, the winning result corresponding processing is performed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the game state based on the winning result is performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result will be described in detail later.

After performing the winning result handling process, the section display second process is executed in step S416. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such a process will be described in detail later. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 grasps the winning winning combination in this game, and the reel control process ends.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it is determined that the small winning combination has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any of the first re-game prize to the twelfth re-game prize is established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game prizes have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game prizes has been established, the re-game setting process for setting the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , End the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, when it is determined that the current game mode is the re-game mode, the automatic input process is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for medal payout is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

Next, the bonus state processing in step S414 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether or not the first BB state or the second BB state is present depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It can be discriminated. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the first BB state and the second BB state are not set, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not one of the BBs has been won. If none of the BB winning flags are set, the bonus state processing ends as it is. If any of the BB winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to the MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated while 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the specified number of cards in the game, in a situation where two or three cards are set as the specified number of cards in the game, the second credit insertion switch 57 can be operated. It is permissible to play a two-bet game. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any of the BB prizes have not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any of the BB prizes has been established, the process proceeds to step S505, and it is determined whether or not the first BB prize has been established.

If the first BB prize is established, in step S506, a process of inputting "15" to the BB counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, when "15" is input to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. As a result, from the next game, an affirmative determination is made in step S501. In the following step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the first BB state is started, and the display control device 81 that has received the first BB start command starts the first BB state. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to the above is performed. Further, in the display control device 81, by receiving the first BB start command, it becomes possible to grasp that the first BB state is from the next game, and the speaker 64 and the speaker 64 so that the effect for the first BB state is performed from the next game. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of cards in the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the specified number of games is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in the 3-bet game.

The initial values of the specified bet number are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the specified bet number is set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the first BB prize has not been established is the case where the second BB prize has been established. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511 and the process of inputting "15" to the BB counter is executed. That is, the second BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, the process of setting the second BB state flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the second BB state is started. The display control device 81 that has received the second BB start command controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the effect for the 2BB state is performed. The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to the extent that the player can identify them. Further, the appearance and contents of the production for the first BB state and the production for the second BB state are different to the extent that the player can identify them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. That is, the specified number of games is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed in the 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S515 to perform processing in the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for the BB state. In the present embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state, but separate lottery tables are provided for each, and the types of winning combinations and the winning probability of each winning combination are different. You may. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the normal lip A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. Normally, the probability of winning Lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 / 61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about. It is 1 / 5.96, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card combination (probability of winning when IV = 24) is about 1 / 1.31. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of losing the winning combination is about 1 in 10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase of about 0.00 plus or minus), and the number of medals does not increase or decrease in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, although the number of medals cannot be expected to increase in the first BB state or the second BB state, it is possible to proceed with the game without reducing the medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and the 1st BB state that can be transferred in the 3-bet game, the main medal increase is the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination in which 13 medals are paid out. In the normal game state, it is a push order bell, and in the first BB state, it is a common bell. Comparing the winning rates of these main small wins, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain operation order in the normal game state, the winning rate is about 1/19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, a prize is won with a probability of about 1/5.96, and in a 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that a prize is more likely to occur than in the normal game state. In addition, in the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transferred in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and the probability of about 1/9.64 in the normal game state. In the 2nd BB state, there is a 1/596 chance of winning a prize, and even in a 2-bet game, the 2nd BB state is more likely to win a prize than the normal game state. It is set.

However, as described above, even if the first BB state and the second BB state are digested, the number of medals held cannot be expected to increase.

In the bonus state processing, in step S515, as a result of the lottery processing by the above-mentioned BB state lottery table and each reel control, it is determined whether or not any of the small winning combination prizes has been established in this game. If the prize is not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning is established, the process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counters of the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S516. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter becomes 0 or less as a result of the subtraction process in step S516. For example, when the common bell is won and the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination are established, 13 cards are paid out. Therefore, in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined in step S517 that the value is not 0 or less, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is 0 or less, in step S518, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed. That is, if it is the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if it is the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, in step S519, the process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step S520, the BB end command corresponding to the BB state that ends this time is set as an output target to the display control device 81. More specifically, the first BB end command is output and set when the first BB state is terminated, and the second BB end command is output and set when the second BB state is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the effect for the end of the first BB and the effect for the end of the second BB are performed.

After that, in step S521, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3, and then the bonus state processing ends. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal gaming state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is played. The game will be played at. That is, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the game is set so as to be easily played in the 2-bet game. By the way, after the end of the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, so that 3 bets cannot be made by operating the 1st credit insertion switch 56 and the 2nd credit insertion switch 57. In order to play the betting game, it is necessary to insert three medals from the medal insertion slot 45.

Here, in the slot machine 10, the playability using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 26.

The normal gaming state in which the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set and neither BB is won is a state called a so-called non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the specified number of bets (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the game is started by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the game is a 2-bet game.

In the non-internal state, in the 3-bet game, the 1st BB can be won, but the 2nd BB cannot be won, and in the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB can be won, but the 1st BB cannot be won. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, basically, the second BB may be won in the two-bet game.

If the first BB or the second BB is won and no prize is established in the winning game, the internal state (carry-over state) is such that the first BB winning or the second BB winning is carried over. Even in the internal state, as described above, the specified number of bets (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the game is started by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the game is a 3-bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the first BB is won, the first BB prize can be established in the 3-bet game, while the first BB prize cannot be established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. Further, in the internal state in which the second BB is won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the second BB winning cannot be established in the 3-bet game, while the second BB winning can be established in the 2-bet game. Will be done. That is, if the first BB is won in the 3-bet game, the first BB prize can be established if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, but if the first BB is won and then the 2-bet game is switched to, the first BB prize is won. Cannot be established. In addition, if the second BB is won in the 2-bet game, the second BB prize can be established if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, but if the second BB is won and then the 3-bet game is switched to, the second BB prize is won. Cannot be established. Then, the first BB and the second BB will not be elected in duplicate, and in a situation where the first BB is carried over, the first BB will not be elected again, and the second BB will not be elected in duplicate. In addition, in the situation where the second BB winning is carried over, the second BB will not be won again, and the first BB will not be won twice. That is, if the game is played in the 2-bet game when the 1st BB is won, the game in the internal state where the 1st BB is won is continued endlessly, and when the 2nd BB is won, the game is played in the 3-bet game. Then, the game in the internal state carrying over the second BB winning will continue endlessly.

Here, as described above, the first BB winning is established only in the 3-bet game, and the second BB winning is established only in the 2-bet game. Therefore, 3 in the situation where the second BB winning is carried over. If the 2nd BB prize is not established even if the result is not won in any of the roles in the betting game, and the result is lost in the 2-bet game in the situation where the 1st BB winning is carried over. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it becomes possible to dramatically simplify the winning combination and the control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the internal state in which the first BB winning and the second BB winning are carried over. If the configuration is such that the second BB winning can be established in the 3-bet game, or the first BB winning can be established in the 2-bet game, the internal state in which the first BB winning or the second BB winning is carried over is displayed. This is because, when trying to continue, it is necessary to use a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a role that may be missed, it is necessary to win a prize in another role at the time of the loss.

Further, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the main role of increasing medals is a common bell. In the non-internal state and the internal state, the main role of increasing medals in the 2-bet game is the common bell, while the main role of increasing medals in the 3-bet game is the push order bell. .. For the common bell, any of the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, whereas for the push order bell, the prize is established. , The small winning combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. In other words, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game are wider than the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, depending on the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the push order bell is won. Is big. Then, for example, the AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation order (FIG. 23) from the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination when the push order bell is won. By switching between the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) and the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game of operating the first credit insertion switch 56, first, the game is played in a 2-bet game in a non-internal state, and the second BB is won in the 2-bet game. When the second BB is won, the internal state is set, the game is switched to the 3-bet game, and the game proceeds in a state where the winning second BB prize cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the game in the internal state in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over is not won in the 1st BB or the 2nd BB winning. It will be continued.

Hereinafter, on the premise of a game in which the second BB winning is carried over, the game performance using the notification (pushing order notification) at the time of winning the push order bell in the game (also referred to as a normal game in the following explanation) is provided. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. The lottery result handling process is a process performed after the lottery process of each game is performed, and is a process of performing a shift lottery to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, a process of grasping the number of bets of the game to be started this time is executed. That is, in step S601, it is grasped whether or not any of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in any of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the number of bets is 3. Further, in the case of the BB state, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the number of bets is 2. As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the first BB and the second BB, and in the internal state after winning the first BB and the second BB, 2 and 3 are set as the specified number of bets, and the first BB state and the second BB are set. In the state, 3 is set as the specified number of bets. The process of step S602 and step S603 is a process of determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific specified number (specified set number) that is specified (set) in association with the game state. If there is no specific specified number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode process (process for the instruction function) after step S604.

That is, in the non-internal state or the internal state, the processing for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, but the processing for the display mode is not executed in the 2-bet game. Further, in the first BB state and the second BB state, since 3 is set as the specified bet number, the 2-bet game is not executed, and the display mode processing is not executed in the first BB state and the second BB state.

That is, in the present embodiment, if the internal state is played in a two-bet game, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode after step S604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to make the internal state play in a 3-bet game and facilitate the normal game in which the second BB is carried over.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding whether or not the push order notification or the like is generated, an advantageous section in which the push order notification or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current game is an advantageous section, is set based on the transition to the advantageous section, and is cleared based on the transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is a normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the advantageous section transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 29, the transition rate to the advantageous section (winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 29, as the trigger of the transition lottery to the advantageous section, normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as triggers for the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, the process of acquiring the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S703. As the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery, a dedicated counter of various counter areas 106e is used, the dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined cycle, and in step S703, the latest updated value of the counter is acquired. Then, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S704, and it is determined in step S705 whether or not the transition lottery has been won. By the way, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so as to win the advantageous section transition lottery with a 100% probability regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the result of the game grasped in step S701 is a trigger for the transition lottery (not a loss result), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

When it is determined in step S705 that the transition lottery has been won, a process of setting the advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S706. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the game has won the transition lottery to the advantageous section in this game. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous section transition lottery process ends.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether or not any of the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is in the AT mode, and is a flag set when the transition to the AT mode is possible. Further, the AT mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the situation is that the AT mode transition lottery is won, the transition to the AT mode is confirmed, and the status is before the AT mode transition. Is. If none of the flags are set in step S606, the AT lottery process is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if any of the flags is set in step S606, the continuation determination process is executed in step S608, and the AT addition process is executed in step S609.

<AT lottery processing>
First, the AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S801, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The ceiling counter is a counter for causing a transition to AT mode (without winning) regardless of whether or not the AT mode transition lottery is successful when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section reaches the number of ceiling games. This is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games. The number of ceiling games is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. By the way, as described above, since the AT lottery process is executed when the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the game state, the ceiling counter has a specific specified number of bets according to the game state. It is subtracted in some games, not in a two-bet game, for example.

After the ceiling counter subtraction process is executed in step S801, it is determined in step S802 whether or not the ceiling counter has reached 0. If it does not reach 0, the AT mode transition lottery process is executed in steps S803 to S808.

That is, in step S803, the process of grasping the lottery result of this game is executed. Then, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. In the present embodiment, as display modes in which the winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery are different, a normal mode and a CZ mode in which it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the normal mode are set, and the CZ mode flag is the CZ mode. This is a flag for the CPU to know that.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S804, the process of acquiring the normal AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed in step S805. On the other hand, when the CZ mode flag is set in step S804, the process of acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is executed in step S806.

As shown in FIG. 29, the winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery are set according to the lottery result of the game in the normal AT mode transition lottery table and the CZ AT mode transition lottery table. If it is an AT mode transition lottery triggered by the eye A, there is a 1% chance of winning the AT mode transition for normal use, and a 3% chance of winning the AT mode transition for CZ. The AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is set so as to be easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ. Further, the normal rip A, the normal rip B, and the normal rip C are set so that the normal rip A, the normal rip B, and the normal rip C cannot win the AT mode transition for the normal use, while the normal rip A, the normal rip B, and the normal rip C can win the AT mode transition for the CZ.

After acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S805 or step S806, the AT mode transition lottery process is performed in step S807 using the acquired transition lottery table and the lottery result of the game grasped in step S803. To execute. Then, in step S808, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition has been won.

When it is determined in step S808 that the AT mode transition is won, and when it is determined in step S802 that the ceiling counter is 0, the processes for AT mode winning in steps S809 to S812 are executed. If it is determined in step S808 that the AT mode transition is not won, the AT mode non-winning process is executed in steps S813 to S816.

In the process for winning the AT mode, in step S809, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, and it is confirmed whether or not the AT mode transition is won in the CZ mode. If the winner is in the CZ mode, the process for ending the CZ mode is performed in steps S810 and S811. That is, in step S810, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed. Then, in step S811, the process of clearing the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e to 0 is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and when shifting to the CZ mode, a value (10) corresponding to the number of continuous games (10 games) in the CZ mode is input, and the game is played. It is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S809, or after the process of step S811 is executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S812. By such processing, affirmative determination is made in step S606 from the next game.

In the process for non-winning the AT mode, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is. If the CZ mode flag is not set, the CZ mode transition lottery process is executed in step S814. In the CZ mode transition lottery process, the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and it is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the CZ mode by using the lottery result of the game grasped in step S803. .. As shown in FIG. 29, the CZ mode transition lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the CZ mode transition lottery differs depending on the lottery result of the game. More specifically, the AT mode transition lottery is won. The easier the game lottery result is, the easier it is to win the CZ mode transition lottery. That is, even though the lottery result of the game is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the transition to the CZ mode is easy.

After executing the CZ mode transition lottery process in step S814, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the CZ mode transition has been won, and if it is not a transition win, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is. In the case of winning the CZ mode transition, the process of setting the CZ mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S816.

After setting either the winning flag in step S812 or step S816, the precursor mode setting process is performed in steps S817 to S820. The precursor mode is a mode for performing a precursor effect suggesting that the player has won the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery. In the present embodiment, when these transition lottery is won, 0 games to 32 games are played. Notification of the transition lottery that has been won after passing through the precursor mode of.

In step S817, the lottery process of the precursor game is executed. In the lottery process for the number of precursor games, the number of precursor games is drawn according to the type of transition lottery that has been won, the lottery result of the game that triggered the winning, and the like. For example, if you win the AT mode transition lottery, it is easier to select a longer number of precursor games than if you win the CZ mode transition lottery, or if you win the transition lottery with Cherry A. It is easier to select a longer number of precursor games than when the player wins the transition lottery in Cherry C.

In the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 in step S817. As described above, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode is terminated regardless of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode. Therefore, the AT mode transition lottery was won through the termination of the CZ mode. Can be grasped by the player. Therefore, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the precursor mode is set to 0 game, and even though it is known that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the transition lottery is won. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the suggestion notification of what has been done as the precursor mode.

In the following step S818, a process of inputting the lottery result of step S817 into the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The precursor counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games of the precursor game, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time the game in the precursor mode is exhausted.

Then, in step S819, a process of setting a precursor flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed, and in step S820, a process of setting a precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the AT lottery is performed. End the processing. The precursor flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the precursor mode is in progress, and the precursor command indicates that the precursor mode has been set, the number of games in the precursor mode, and which transition lottery has been won. This is a command for the control device 81 to grasp. The display control device 81 that has received the precursor command grasps the number of games in the precursor mode and the type of the transition lottery that has been won, and performs a process for executing the effect in the precursor mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. conduct.

<Continuity judgment processing>
Next, the continuation determination process executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the continuation determination process is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag are set.

Here, in the AT mode in the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 18) of games is set as one set (unit continuation number, unit state), and for example, one set of AT modes is updated (set). When starting or ending the set), a continuous lottery for the next set is performed, and if the continuous lottery is won, after the end of the set, the game moves to the next set and the continuous lottery is not won. If is, the AT mode is terminated without moving to the next set. Then, in the continuation determination process of step S608, it is a process for performing the above-mentioned continuous lottery when updating the set.

In step S901, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 18. The AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in one set, and is a counter in which 18 is input when updating the set. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is a set of start games in the AT mode. If it is not the start game, the continuation determination process is terminated as it is. If it is a start game, the process proceeds to step S902.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the AT set counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 0. The AT set counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of sets that can be continued to the next set even if the above continuous lottery is not won or without performing the continuous lottery, and the continuation condition is It is a counter in which 1 is added when an additional win is made in the established situation, and 1 is subtracted when the continuous lottery is not won or when the continuous lottery is continued to the next set. When the AT set counter is 0, the winning probability of the continuous lottery selected in the current AT mode is grasped in step S903.

Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of continuation rates are set as the winning probability of the above-mentioned continuous lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as “continuation rate”), and specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, the most continuous. The high rate of 90% and the lower continuation rates of 60% and 10% are set. The continuation rate is set at the time of transition to the AT mode (continuation rate setting process in step S1211 described later). In step S903, the information set in the continuation rate setting process is read out, and the continuation rate of the current AT mode is grasped.

After grasping the continuation rate in step S903, the continuation lottery process is executed in step S904. That is, when the continuation rate of 90% is selected, the continuation winning is performed with a probability of 90% in the process of step S904, and when the continuation rate of 10% is selected, 10 is selected in the process of step S904. There is a% chance that you will continue to win.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the processing result of step S904 is a continuous winning, and if it is a continuous winning, a process of setting the continuation flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S906. The continuation flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the continuation condition (condition for shifting to the next set) of this set is satisfied. Then, in step S907, the process of setting the continuation command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the continuation determination process ends.

If it is determined in step S902 that the AT set counter is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the AT set counter is executed in step S908, and then the process proceeds to step S906 to set the continuation flag and the continuation command. After setting, the continuation determination process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT set counter is not 0, the continuation condition of the set is satisfied without going through the continuous lottery. It should be noted that the continuous lottery may be executed regardless of the value of the AT set counter, and the continuation condition may be satisfied if the AT set counter is 1 or more when the continuous lottery is not won.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the start of one set of AT modes (when the start lever 41 is operated), the success or failure of the continuation condition of whether or not the AT mode continues until the next set of the set to be started this time. When the determination is made and it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied, the continuation flag is set and the information is output to the display control device 81. In this case, the display control device 81 performs a process for performing the effect on the premise that the continuation condition is satisfied as the effect of this set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S905 that the winning is not continuous, the continuation determination process is terminated as it is. In this case, the continuation condition is not satisfied at the start of one set of AT mode, and the continuation command is not output at the start of the set. The display control device 81 grasps that the continuation condition is not satisfied by not receiving the continuation command at the start of the set, and performs an effect on the premise that the continuation condition is not satisfied as the effect of this set. Perform the process to do so.

<Process for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition process executed in step S609 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. In the AT addition process, in addition to the above continuous lottery, an additional lottery is performed by adding the number of AT mode sets, and if the additional lottery is won, the result of the continuous lottery for the next set is not relevant. Try to continue until the next set.

First, in step S1001, the lottery result of this game is grasped. Then, in step S1002, a process of acquiring an additional lottery table from various table storage areas 105a is executed.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the additional lottery table, the additional winning rate is set according to the lottery result of the game, and it is easy to win in the lottery process of each game. While normal roles such as bells do not win additional prizes, special roles such as chance eyes A to chance C, cherry A to cherry C, common bells, and watermelons, which are difficult to win in the lottery process of each game, are set to be added and won. Has been done. Then, among the specific roles, for example, the chance eye C is easier to add and win than the chance eye A, and the cherry C is easier to add and win than the cherry A, and so on, in the lottery process of each game. The more difficult the lottery result is, the easier it is to win the additional lottery. If the lottery result of each game is a normal winning combination, the additional lottery may not be performed, and if the lottery result of each game is a normal winning combination, the additional lottery may not be performed. Further, even if the lottery result of each game is a normal winning combination, the additional winning may be made so that the probability of the additional winning in the normal winning combination is lower than the probability of the additional winning in the case of the specific winning combination. ..

After acquiring the additional lottery table in step S1002, the additional lottery is executed in step S1003, and it is determined in step S1004 whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery is not won, the AT addition process is terminated as it is. If the additional lottery is won, it is determined in step S1005 whether or not the continuation flag is set.

If the continuation flag is not set in step S1005, the process of setting the continuation flag is executed in step S1006. Then, in step S1007, the process of setting the continuation command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for adding the AT is completed. The display control device 81 that has received the continuation command executes a process for performing the effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64.

On the other hand, when the continuation flag is set in step S1005, the process of adding 1 to the AT set counter is executed in step S1008. By adding 1 to the AT set counter in step S1008, it is determined that the AT mode continues at least until the next set following the current set. In the present embodiment, 1 is uniformly added to the AT set counter when the additional lottery is won, but a number of 2 or more may be added. For example, the opportunity for the additional winning. The number to be added to the AT set counter may be determined by lottery according to the lottery result of the game.

In the following step S1009, the process of setting the set addition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the main addition process is terminated. The set addition command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the addition lottery has been won and the value of the AT set counter. In the case where a plurality of sets are added by one addition and winning, it is preferable to set the information of the number of sets to be added to the set addition command. The display control device 81 that has received the set addition command executes a process for performing the effect corresponding to the set addition on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64.

After executing the process of step S607 or step S609 in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 27), the process for notifying the push order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is executed in steps S610 to S613.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the explanation of the push order notification process executed in steps S610 to S613, the outline of the push order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the push order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65. Will be described. The push order notification and the push order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, push order navigation, order notification, and mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the push order notification is performed by the main control device 101. On the other hand, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the push order notification effect.

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 (a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 33 (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 33A, the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to light the display segment. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

For each display segment N1 to N8, in detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the area where the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

If it is possible to individually display the symbols of a plurality of patterns on the instruction monitor 68, the shapes and arrangement modes of the display segments N1 to N8 are arbitrary, and further, 7 instead of the eight segments. A configuration using 9 segments, 9 segments, or the like may be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 may be appropriately changed. Further, it is not essential to control the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the light source on and off, and if the display control can be performed individually in each display segment N1 to N8, A segment display may be configured by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbol may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for notifying the operation order of the push order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the winning mode is advantageous for the player by performing the stop operation in the order of "left"-> "middle"-> "right" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. In that case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed, and "1" is displayed. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the order of "right"-> "left"-> "middle" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is advantageous for the player, the first display segment N1 The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and displayed, and "5" is displayed. That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The eighth display segment N8 shifts to an advantageous section, and when a predetermined start condition including a notification condition that causes a push order notification to occur is satisfied, the eighth display segment N8 is lit in a game in which the start condition is satisfied. .. Further, when the AT mode ends and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, the light is turned off.

That is, the section in which the operation order of the push order bell or the like is easily notified so that the player can easily win a prize in an advantageous manner is set as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is In the advantageous section, it lights up during a specific section where the benefit of push order notification is actually obtained, and turns off during a normal section that is not an advantageous section or a non-specific section that is not a specific section even if it is an advantageous section. It serves as a section indicator (specific notification means).

As described above, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player, in other words, the front portion of the gaming machine below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like are provided. Is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is suppressed from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like, and is arranged at a position that is easy for the player to see. Further, it can be said that oversight by the player is suppressed from the fact that the player who advances the game aiming at the acquisition of the medal is arranged near the payout number display unit 62 which is easy to watch.

Further, in the instruction monitor 68, in particular, the eighth display segment N8 has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display units (for example, the payout number display unit 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is defined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display unit). Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display unit are controlled to emit light (when they are in the lit state), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine should be higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display (more specifically, the illuminance of the surrounding display 2). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is defined (so that the illuminance is doubled). From such a configuration, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and oversight when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on is suppressed.

Next, the push order notification effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the push order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43), and the display is larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize that the winning combination in this game and the stop switch to be operated first are the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a number is displayed on the right button display so as to indicate that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is attached and displayed, and the number 3 is attached to the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), in the auxiliary display unit 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), on the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the execution timing of the push order notification, the push order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. Is set to run. By configuring the push order notification to be executed at a timing before the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 become effective in this way, the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It becomes possible to make the operation desired, and the game can proceed at a good tempo.

The process for notifying the push order in steps S610 to S613 will be described.

That is, in step S610, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is the push order bell winning. If the push order bell is not won, the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is. If the push order bell is won, it is determined in step S611 whether or not the AT mode flag is set. When the AT mode flag is set, in step S612, the instruction monitor 68 is set so that the push order notification corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is performed according to the type of the push order bell this time. Control. Then, in step S613, after executing the process of setting the push order notification command including the operation order information corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination as an output target to the display control device 81. , Ends the push order notification process. The display control device 81 that has received this push order notification command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that the push order notification effect corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination winning is performed. If the AT mode flag is not set in step S611, the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is.

<Processing for winning results>
Next, the winning result handling process performed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. In the winning result handling process, processing for starting and ending the AT mode is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step S1101, it is grasped whether or not one of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in any of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the number of bets is 3. Further, in the case of the BB state, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the number of bets is 2. That is, the processes of steps S1101 to S1103 are processes corresponding to the processes of steps S601 to S603, and it is determined whether or not the number is one specific specified number associated with the gaming state. It is a process. If the number is not a specific specified number, the winning result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode processing (processing for the instruction function) after step S1104.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102 or step S1103 and the number of bets is a specific specified number, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set. When the precursor flag is set, it means that after winning the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery, the notification that these transition lottery has been won has not been performed yet. In this case, in step S1105, the precursor mode process is executed, and then the winning result handling process ends.

On the other hand, if the precursor flag is not set in step S1104, it is determined in step S1106 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set and the CZ mode is in progress, the CZ mode processing is executed in step S1107, and then the winning result corresponding processing is terminated.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S1106, it is determined in step S1108 whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is set and the AT mode is in progress, the AT mode process is executed in step S1109, and then the winning result handling process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1108, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

Hereinafter, the precursor mode processing, the CZ mode processing, and the AT mode processing will be described.

<Processing for precursor mode>
In the precursor mode process, as shown in FIG. 36, a process of subtracting 1 from the precursor counter is executed in step S1201. Then, in step S1202, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter has become 0, and if it has not become 0, the precursor mode process is terminated as it is. If the precursor counter is 0, the process of clearing the precursor flag is executed in step S1203.

In the following step S1204, by determining whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode of this time has shifted based on winning the AT mode transition lottery. If the AT mode winning flag is not set and the precursor mode this time is based on winning the CZ mode transition lottery, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, a process of clearing the CZ mode winning flag is executed. Then, the CZ mode flag is set in step S1206, and the process of inputting 10 as a predetermined number to the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S1207. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted in the CZ mode. After that, in step S1208, the process of setting the CZ start command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for this precursor mode is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the CZ start command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to notify that the CZ mode has been started as well as to notify that the CZ mode transition lottery has been won.

If the AT mode winning flag is set in step S1204 and the precursor mode this time is a precursor mode based on winning the AT mode transition lottery, the process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is performed in step S1209. Run. Then, in step S1210, the process of setting the AT mode flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed. In the following step S1211, the continuation rate setting process is executed. As described above, the AT mode in the present embodiment is a set management type AT mode in which a predetermined number of games is set as one set, and is set in a situation where there is no remaining set number (a situation in which the AT set counter is 0). The AT mode continues until the continuous lottery is not won, and the continuation rate setting process in step S1211 is a process of setting the winning probability (continuation rate) of the continuous lottery.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the selection rates of the plurality of continuation rates (90%, 60%, 10%) provided are different depending on the set value set in the winning probability setting process. In step S1211, it is determined by lottery which continuation rate to select based on the set value. Specifically, basically, the higher the set value (the higher the ball output rate is set), the easier it is to select a higher continuation rate. For example, the continuation rate of 60% is set to setting 1. Is selected with a 30% probability, whereas in setting 6, it is selected with a 70% probability. However, the 90% continuation rate is easier to select in the odd-numbered setting than in the even-numbered setting, and the setting value most easily selected is setting 5. When the continuation rate of 90% is selected, the 90% flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d, and when the continuation rate of 60% is selected, the 60% flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. When the continuation rate of 10% is selected, the 10% flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) indicating each of these continuation rates is a flag that is cleared when the AT mode to be shifted this time ends. That is, once the continuation rate of the AT mode is set, the continuous lottery of each set is performed at the continuation rate until the AT mode ends.

After executing the continuation rate setting process in step S1211, the process of inputting 18 to the AT game counter is executed in step S1212. As described above, the AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games until one set of the AT mode is completed, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted. Then, if the continuation condition is satisfied when the AT game counter becomes 0, a predetermined number of 18 is input to the AT game counter again, and the continuation condition is satisfied when the AT game counter becomes 0. If not, the AT mode will be terminated.

After that, in step S1212, the process of setting the AT start command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and the process for the precursor mode is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the AT start command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to perform an effect corresponding to the start of the AT mode.

<Processing for CZ mode>
In the CZ mode processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, the processing of subtracting 1 from the CZ game counter is executed in step S1301. In the following step S1302, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step S1301. If the CZ game counter is not 0, the CZ mode processing is terminated as it is.

If the CZ game counter is 0, the process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step S1303. After that, in step S1304, the process of setting the CZ end command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for this CZ mode is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the CZ end command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to notify that the CZ mode has ended. As described above, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode ends at that point and the mode shifts to the precursor mode. Therefore, when the CZ mode is terminated by clearing the CZ mode flag in step S1303, it means that the AT mode transition lottery was not won during the CZ mode.

<Processing for AT mode>
In the AT mode process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, the process of subtracting 1 from the AT game counter is executed in step S1401. In the following step S1402, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step S1401. If the AT game counter is not 0, the AT mode processing is terminated as it is.

If the AT game counter is 0, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not the continuation flag is set. When the continuation flag is set and the continuation condition is satisfied, the process for shifting to the next set (step S1404 to step S1406) is executed. On the other hand, if the continuation flag is not set in step S1403, the process for terminating the AT mode (step S1407 to step S1410) is executed.

If the continuation condition is satisfied in step S1403, the process of clearing the continuation flag is executed in step S1404. Then, in step S1404, the process of inputting 18 to the AT game counter is executed, and in step S1406, the process of setting the set update command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for this AT mode is executed. To finish. The display control device 81 that has received the set update command executes a process for updating the effects of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 in response to the shift of the AT mode set.

On the other hand, if the continuation condition is not satisfied in step S1403, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1407, and the continuation rate information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) is cleared in step S1408. Execute the process. Then, in step S1409, a process of setting the AT mode end flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed. After that, in step S1410, the process of setting the AT end command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for this AT mode is ended. The AT mode end flag is a flag for ending the advantageous section at the end of the AT mode. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode end command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so as to perform an effect corresponding to the end of the AT mode.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, the section display first process and the section display second process for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator, shifting to the advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. 40. The first section display process is a process performed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery result is based on the lottery result. It is carried out after the display mode transition lottery or the like (lottery result correspondence processing) is performed.

In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, and more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates a case where at least a specific section in which the push order notification can occur is satisfied among the advantageous sections. If a negative determination is made in step S1501 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1502.

In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag set when the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the advantageous section transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. When the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1503. Then, in step S1504, the process of setting the advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1505, a process of starting counting the number of games in the advantageous section, more specifically, measuring the number of games AG in the advantageous section of various counter areas 106e is performed. The advantageous section game number AG corresponds to a grasping means for grasping the number of executed games in the advantageous section. Then, in step S1506, the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section is executed. The processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section is a process for setting the state and the degree of advantage of the advantageous section to be transferred this time. Specifically, in the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section, the above ceiling counter is set by lottery or the like, and after the transition to the advantageous section, the number of ceiling games that allow the transition to AT mode without winning the AT mode transition lottery is set. I do. For example, the lottery of the ceiling counter may be performed by using the set value or the lottery result of the game. The higher the setting, the easier it is to select a shorter number of ceiling games, or the even number setting is better than the odd number setting. It is preferable to make it easier to select the number of short ceiling games, or to make it easier to select the number of short ceiling games as the result of the lottery of this game is less likely to be won. Then, it is preferable to input a value corresponding to the number of ceiling games determined by lottery to the ceiling counter. For example, the number of ceiling games is suggested by outputting a ceiling command including information corresponding to the ceiling counter to the display control device 81. The effect may be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64.

In the first section display process, after the advantageous section transition process is executed in step S1506, the section indicator display is started by turning on the eighth display segment N8 in step S1507.

When it is determined in step S1501 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, the process of continuing the display in the advantageous section is executed in step S1508. Specifically, in step S1508, a process for continuing the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state is performed. That is, the process for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display process.

If it is determined in step S1502 that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set, after executing the display start process in step S1507 or executing the display continuation process in step S1508, the AT mode is set in step S1509. Determine if the flag is set. If it is determined in step S1509 that none of the AT mode flags are set, in step S1510, a process of adding 1 to the combination ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which push order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1509 that any AT mode flag is set, in step S1511, a process of adding 1 to the combination ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Run. The combination ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which push order notification can be generated, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1510 or step S1511, the combination ratio calculation process is executed in step S1512. In such a process, the value of the combination ratio second counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the combination ratio first counter and the combination ratio second counter. That is, the combination ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur to the total number of games. Then, in step S1513, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S1512 on the combination monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the combination monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display units composed of seven display segments. Specifically, the combination monitor 77 has a first display unit 77a, a second display unit 77b, a third display unit 77c, a fourth display unit 77d, and a fifth display unit 77e as a 7-segment display unit. There is. The display segments in the first display unit 77a to the fifth display unit 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are on / off controlled. By doing so, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to light any combination of display segments. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the combination monitor 77, and in particular, the combination monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. There is.

In step S1513, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1512 is output to the combination monitor 77, and the display units 77a to 77e on the combination monitor 77 display the four-digit number on the combination monitor 77. Display control is performed. Specifically, the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur out of the total number of games is a number smaller than 1 such as "0.5012" and up to 4 digits after the decimal point. The numerical value is displayed on the combination monitor 77. After executing the process of step S1513, the section display first process is terminated.

In addition, in the arithmetic processing of step S1512, the display control of the combination ratio monitor 77 may be performed after performing the processing of rounding off the number of the fifth digit after the decimal point. Further, among the combination monitor 77, the first display unit 77a basically displays "0", so that the first display unit 77a is not provided, the first display unit 77a is printed, or the like. It may be configured so that "0" is always displayed. Further, it is preferable that the decimal point is displayed between the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b by printing or the like.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. As described above, the second section display process is a process performed in step S416 of the reel control process, and at the end of one game, the medal is paid out (payout determination process) and the game state is changed based on the winning result. Etc. (processing for handling winning results) will be performed.

In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the second section display process is terminated as it is. If the advantageous section flag is set, the process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed in step S1602. Specifically, the process of adding 1 to the number of games AG in the advantageous section is performed. In the following step S1603, the update process of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step S1603, the number of inserted cards (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts on the condition that the game result of this game is not one of the re-game winnings, and the subtraction result is used as the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY. By adding to, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is updated.

After executing the MY update process in step S1603, the remaining number of games management process is executed in step S1604, and the remaining number management process is executed in the subsequent step S1605. The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games) with the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, is the total of the advantageous section game number AG (the number of digested games in the advantageous section) and the AT game counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode) larger than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section? Know if or not. Then, in such a situation, the first excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 cards) with the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. Is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the total of the expected increase number calculated from the AT game counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is the increase / decrease number of the advantageous section. Know if there are more situations. Then, in such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

After executing the remaining game number management process and the remaining number management process, in step S1606, whether or not the above-mentioned advantageous section game number AG reaches 1500, which is the upper limit number of games, or the upper limit increase in the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY It is determined whether or not the number is 2400 or more. When any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, in step S1607, the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY are cleared to 0. In the following step S1608, a process of ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is performed. Then, in step S1609, after executing the process of initializing the parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second process of displaying this section ends.

Regarding the initialization process of the advantageous section information in step S1609, specifically, the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the advantageous section this time and the flags and counters set during the advantageous section this time are set as initial values. Execute the process to return to. For example, if the advantageous section flag, various AT mode flags, and the like are not cleared and are set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the advantageous section game number AG, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY, the counter for the number of continuous games in the AT mode, the AT preparation counter, and the like are larger than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process of the information for the advantageous section, all variables or parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification. This is a process for clearing RAM for variables or parameters.

If it is determined in step S1606 that the advantageous section game number AG has not reached the upper limit value and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step S1610 and the AT mode end flag is set. Determine if it is. If the AT mode end flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1607 and the process for ending the advantageous section is executed. If the AT mode end flag is not set, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed as it is.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. When a new command is received, in step S1702, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer in which a plurality of commands can be individually stored and can be read from the previously stored command.

When a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the process of step S1702 is executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation, and is a bet command or the like set in step S206 of the normal process. If it is a bet-time command, the bet-time effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current bet operation is executed in step S1704.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or after the process of step S1704 is executed, it is determined in step S1705 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and corresponds to the lottery result in addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process. There are precursor commands, continuation commands, set addition commands, push order notification commands, etc. that are set in processing (FIG. 27) and the like. In the case of these start-time commands, the start-time effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

When a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after the process of step S1706 is executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command is a command at each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the respective stop operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a command output from the main control device 101, and is step S406 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). It is a stop command command set in. In the case of a stop command command as each stop operation command, step S1708 executes each stop operation effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current stop operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or after the process of step S1708 is executed, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of total stop. The all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and the winning result set in step S419 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In addition to the commands, the first BB start command, the second BB start command, the first BB end command, the second BB end command, the CZ start command, which are set in the bonus state processing (FIG. 24) and the winning result correspondence processing (FIG. 35), etc. There are AT start command, CZ end command, set update command, AT end command, and the like. In the case of these commands at the time of all stops, the effect setting process at the time of all stops is executed in step S1710.

If a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after the process of step S1710 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1711, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S1711, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, and the like are controlled so that the various effects set in each of the above-mentioned effect setting processes are executed at the corresponding timings. Further, in step S1711, the effect based on the command from the main control device 101 other than at the time of betting, the start time, and the stop time (for example, the effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59) is set, and the main control device 101 is not used. Set the effect based on the signal from the sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.) connected to, set for error notification, and so on.

Hereinafter, the start effect setting process and the all stop effect setting process will be described.

<Starting effect setting process>
The effect setting process at the start of step S1706 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game started this time is the push order winning combination (pushing order bell winning) based on the received lottery result command. If the push order combination is won, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not the push order notification command has been received. When the push order notification command is received, in step S1803, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. Perform the settings.

If it is determined in step S1801 that the lottery result of the current game is not the push order winning combination, it is determined in step S1804 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the specific winning combination. As already explained, the specific role is a lottery result called a so-called rare role that is hard to appear (difficult to win) as a lottery result of each game, and in this embodiment, chance eye A to chance eye C, cherry A to Cherry C and watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in FIG. 29, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is set to be higher than other lottery results. Further, in the AT mode additional lottery, if these specific winning combinations are won, the additional lottery can be won, while if the normal winning combination such as normal lip A is won, the additional lottery cannot be won. If the lottery result of this game is a specific combination winning, the process of setting the specific combination notification effect is executed in step S1805. In the setting process of the specific role notification effect, a setting is executed so that the specific role notification that the lottery result of this game is one of the above specific roles is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. .. As the specific combination notification, for example, an effect is set in which three characters of the exclamation mark are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided.

If a negative determination is made in step S1802 or step S1804, or after executing the process of step S1803 or step S1805, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, it is determined whether or not a precursor command has been received as the start command this time. When the precursor command is received, the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is won, and the precursor mode is set, the number of precursor games is increased to the sub-side precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 183b in step S1807. Executes the process of inputting the corresponding value. The sub-side precursor counter corresponds to the precursor counter in the main control device 101, is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the precursor mode, and the situation where the sub-side precursor counter is larger than 0 is a precursor. Become a mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S1806, or after the process of step S1807 is executed, it is determined in step S1808 whether or not the above-mentioned sub-side precursor counter is larger than 0. When the sub-side precursor counter is larger than 0 and the precursor mode is in progress, the process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side precursor counter is executed in step S1809. Then, in step S1810, a process of setting the effect for the precursor mode according to the value of the sub-side precursor counter is executed. For example, the smaller the value of the sub-side precursor counter, the stronger the effect of suggesting that one of the transition lottery has been won may be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64.

If a negative determination is made in step S1808, or after the process of step S1810 is executed, the AT effect setting process is executed in step S1811, and other start effect setting processes are executed in step S1812. At the start The effect setting process ends. In step S1812, for example, a process for setting an effect suggesting a lottery result corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, or the like is executed. do. The AT effect setting process will be described in detail later.

<Production setting process when all stops>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of total stop in step S1710 in the effect setting process (FIG. 42) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44. As already explained, in the effect setting process at the time of all stop, the newly received commands are the winning result command, the first BB start command, the second BB start command, the first BB end command, the second BB end command, the CZ start command, and the AT start. This is a process for setting the effect when the command, CZ end command, set update command, AT end command, etc. are all stopped commands.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the CZ start command has been received. When the CZ start command is received, the process of setting the sub-side CZ flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S1902, and the CZ start effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 in step S1903. Execute the effect setting process for. For example, as shown in FIG. 45A, the CZ start effect indicates that the CZ mode is started and the number of remaining games (10) in the CZ mode is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not the CZ end command has been received. When the CZ end command is received, the process of clearing the above sub-side CZ flag is executed in step S1905, and the effect setting for performing the CZ end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step S1906. Execute the process. As shown in FIG. 45B, for example, the CZ end effect is set to notify that the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is 0 and the CZ mode has ended. In each game in which the sub-side CZ flag is set, the CPU 181 is set so that the effect for the CZ mode is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. In the production for the CZ mode, for example, the background color, the characters appearing, and the like are different from those in the normal mode so that the player can identify that the mode is in the CZ mode. Further, in performing the effect for the CZ mode, the CPU 181 controls the display of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode so as to update (subtract) the display according to the progress of the game.

If a negative determination is made in step S1904, it is determined in step S1907 whether or not the AT start command has been received. When the AT start command is received, the process of setting the sub-side AT flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S1908, and the sub-side AT counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed in the subsequent step S1909. The process of inputting 18 is executed. The sub-side AT counter corresponds to the AT game counter on the main control device 101 side. After executing the process of step S1909, the process of adding 1 to the sub-side set counters provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed in step S1910. The sub-side set counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of sets in the AT mode.

In the following step S1911, the effect setting process for performing the AT start effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. As the AT start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 46A, an effect of displaying that the AT mode is started (character display such as "AT start") is set. In the AT start effect, for example, the background and the sound effect may be set differently according to the continuation rate so as to suggest the continuation rate of the AT mode to be started.

If a negative determination is made in step S1907, it is determined in step S1912 whether or not the AT end command has been received. When the AT end command is received, the process of clearing the sub-side AT flag is executed in step S1913, and the effect setting process for performing the AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed in step S1914. Run. For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the AT end effect is a notification of the end of the AT mode (character display such as "See you") and notification of the number of continuous sets and the number of medals won in the current AT mode. The production to perform is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S1912, it is determined in step S1915 whether or not the set update command has been received. When a set update command is received, one set of AT mode is completed, and the next set is started, a process of clearing the sub-side continuation flag set in various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S1916. do. The sub-side continuation flag corresponds to the continuation flag on the main control device 101 side. In the following step S1917, it is confirmed whether or not the generated flags are set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and if they are set, a process of clearing the generated flags is executed. The generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that a predetermined specific effect has occurred in the set ending this time. The specific effect will be described in detail later, but in step S1917, when updating the set, a process of erasing the information that the specific effect has occurred in the set before the update is performed.

After executing the process of step S1917, the process of inputting 18 to the sub-side AT counter is executed in step S1918, and the process of adding 1 to the sub-side set counter is executed in step S1919.

After executing the processes of step S1903, step S1906, step S1911, step S1914 or step S1919, or after making a negative determination in step S1915, after executing the other all-stop effect setting process in step S1920, Ends the effect setting process when all stops. In step S1920, processing is performed to perform an effect corresponding to various commands output at the start and end of the BB, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit with a color corresponding to the winning combination, and the winning combination is used. The sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, and the sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet at the time of replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

<AT production setting process>
Next, the AT effect setting process executed in step S1811 in the start effect setting process (FIG. 43) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47. The AT effect setting process is a process for performing an effect in the AT mode. Therefore, prior to the description of the AT effect setting process, an outline of the effect in the AT mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53.

<Outline of AT production>
As described above, the AT mode in the present embodiment is a set management type AT mode in which 18 games as a predetermined number are set as one set, and if the continuation condition is satisfied when one set of games is digested. While moving to the next set, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the AT mode ends in the set. In the present embodiment, as an effect in one set, the ally character and the enemy character confront each other, and if the continuation condition is satisfied, the ally character wins, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the ally character is defeated. The enemy character wins. In this embodiment, the effects performed in the first 10 games and the latter 8 games in one set of games are different, and the battle effect in which the above-mentioned ally character and the enemy character confront each other is in the latter 8 games. In the first half part, which is performed in a certain second half part and is the first half 10 games, a confrontation effect is set in which the ally character and the enemy character who perform the battle effect confront each other.

As the confrontation effect of the first half part, as shown in FIG. 49, in the first game, a VS display effect (FIG. 52 (a1)) in which the confronting ally character and the enemy character are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is set. Has been done. In the 2nd to 4th games of the confrontation effect, the ally character up effect (FIG. 52 (b1)) is set in which the appearance of the ally character wearing an aura behind him and enthusiastic is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Has been done. In the 5th to 7th games of the confrontation effect, an enemy character up effect (FIG. 52 (c1)) in which the enemy character illuminated by the moonlit night is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is set. In the 8th to 10th games of the confrontation effect, a glaring effect (FIG. 52 (d1)) is set in which the appearance of the ally character and the enemy character glaring at each other while scattering sparks is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. ing.

As the battle effect of the latter half part, as shown in FIG. 50, in the 11th to 16th games, the ally attack effect (FIG. 53 (a)) attacked by the ally character and the enemy attack effect attacked by the enemy character. Any one of the attack effects (FIG. 53 (b)) is repeated a total of three times, and the two-sided attack effect is performed in the 17th game in which both sides attack each other. Then, when the continuation condition is satisfied, the ally victory effect (FIG. 53 (c)) in which the ally character wins in the 18th game, which is the final game of the set, is performed to move to the next set. If the continuation condition is not satisfied, the ally defeat effect (FIG. 53 (d)) in which the ally character is defeated is performed in the 18th game, and the AT mode ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a set of effects is set such that the battle effect is performed after the confrontation effect, and the success or failure of the continuation condition is notified by the battle effect, and the content of the battle effect is set. And the degree of attention to the result is preferably increased.

As described above, in the set management type AT mode in the present embodiment, a continuous lottery is performed at the start of one set to determine the success or failure of the continuation condition, and even if the continuous lottery is not won, the set is set. If the additional lottery based on the specific winning combination is won in the middle of the game, the continuation condition is satisfied and the game moves to the next set.

Here, by configuring the continuation condition to be satisfied based on the winning of the specific winning combination as described above, the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game is preferably increased, but the winning probability of the specific winning combination and the set game. Depending on the number, by winning the above-mentioned additional lottery, an event in which the continuation condition is satisfied is less likely to occur, and the player may not expect such an event. Then, even if an attempt is made to increase the degree of attention to the lottery result of the game by using the additional lottery, there is a possibility that the effect cannot be expected.

In particular, when trying to improve the playability and game progress of the AT mode by increasing the number of medals increased per game (net increase number) in the AT mode, the number of games per set of the AT mode is small. As described above, the event in which the continuation condition is satisfied is less likely to occur. Moreover, since the maximum number of games is set in the advantageous section, it is possible to increase the number of games in the normal mode and CZ mode other than the AT mode, and to increase the maximum number of medals (2400 medals) in the AT mode. If this is done, the number of games in the AT mode is naturally reduced and the above-mentioned net increase in the number of games is likely to be increased, and the event that the continuation condition is satisfied with a specific combination is less likely to occur.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the continuous lottery of the set is won, the lottery result of the game is obtained in the game before the notification of winning the continuous lottery (the above-mentioned ally victory effect). Even if it is not a specific role, it is configured to notify as if it was won in the additional lottery.

Then, as described above, by notifying the result of the continuous lottery based on the lottery result of each game, the success or failure of the continuation condition is not determined by the continuous lottery at the time of updating each set. It is possible to give the impression that the success or failure of the continuation condition of each set is decided based on the lottery result of each game.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for producing the effects of each set in the AT mode as described above will be described.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the AT effect setting process, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter is executed in step S2001. Then, in step S2002, it is determined whether or not a continuation command is received as the start command this time. As already explained, the continuation command is output when the continuous lottery is won at the start of one set (at the start of the first game of the set) (Fig. 31), and the continuous lottery is not won. This is a command output when the additional lottery is won in the set (FIG. 32).

When the continuation command is received in step S2002, the process of setting the sub-side continuation flag is executed in step S2003. By such processing, the CPU 181 can grasp that the continuation condition of this set is satisfied.

If a negative determination is made in step S2002, or after the process of step S2003 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2004. In step S2004, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is larger than 7, and thus it is determined whether or not it is the first game to the tenth game of the set. In the case of the 1st to 10th games of the set, the process for performing the confrontation effect which is the first half part is executed in steps S2005 to S2008, and in the case of the 11th to 18th games, the process is executed. In steps S2009 to S2013, the process for performing the battle effect, which is the latter half part, is executed.

As a process for performing the confrontation effect, a process of acquiring the confrontation effect table from various table storage areas 182a is executed in step S2005. As shown in FIG. 49, the confrontation effect table has detailed effect contents (VS display effect, ally character up effect, enemy character up) to be executed in each game according to the value of the sub-side AT counter. (Direction, glaring production) is memorized.

Here, as the confrontation effect, a normal effect and a specific effect are set, and if the continuation condition of this set is satisfied, the confrontation effect as the specific effect can occur. In the specific effect, a part of the effect content on the auxiliary display unit 65 is set as an effect different from the normal effect.

For example, in the VS display effect, the character "VS" displayed between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed in white in the normal effect, whereas the character "VS" is displayed in the specific effect. The characters are set to be displayed in red. In the ally character up effect, the aura worn by the ally character is white in the normal effect, whereas the aura is displayed in rainbow color in the specific effect. In the enemy character up effect, the crescent moon is displayed in the normal effect, whereas the full moon is displayed in the specific effect. In the glaring effect, the appearance of the girl character cheering for the ally character is displayed in the specific effect, whereas the girl character is set not to appear in the normal effect.

After acquiring the confrontation effect table in step S2005, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set, and if it is set, the specific effect setting process is executed in step S2007. do. The specific effect setting process is a process for setting whether or not to execute the specific effect in the confrontation effect in which the normal effect and the specific effect are set as described above.

<Specific effect setting process>
In the specific effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, it is determined in step S2101 whether or not the generated flags are set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the specific effect has already been generated in this set, and is a flag set when the specific effect is generated. If the generated flag is set, the specific effect setting process is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is set so that it can occur only once in one set.

If the generated flag is not set, the process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed in step S2102, and the process of grasping the continuation rate of the current AT mode is executed in step S2103. Then, in step S2104, the process of acquiring the specific effect table from the various table storage areas 182a is executed, and in step S2105, the specific effect lottery process is executed.

In the specific effect table, as shown in FIG. 51, the occurrence rate of the specific effect is set according to the lottery result of each game and the continuation rate of the AT mode. For example, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the specific effect occurs with a probability of 3.1% in the game with chance A, while the specific effect has a probability of 20.0% in the game with chance B. It is set so that the effect is generated and the specific effect is more likely to occur as the result of the lottery of the game is less likely to be won. Moreover, in the present embodiment, not only the specific role as a so-called rare role such as the chance eye A and the chance eye B, but also the normal role, the normal lip A, the normal lip B, the normal lip C, and the push order bell. However, it is set so that a specific effect can occur. In addition, it is set so that a specific effect can occur even if the result is not won in any of the results.

In this case, for example, as a result of the lottery of each game, the push order bell is won with a probability of about 65%, and in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the push order bell is used as an opportunity to identify the push order bell with a probability of about 3.8%. Since the effect is generated, the probability that the specific effect will occur in each game triggered by the push order bell is about 2.5%. On the other hand, for example, in Cherry C, where a specific effect always occurs when it appears, the lottery result of each game is won with a probability of about 0.008%, so that the specific effect is triggered by Cherry C in each game. The probability of occurrence of is also about 0.008%, which is lower than the occurrence rate triggered by the push order bell.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability that a specific effect will occur triggered by the normal role of the normal lip A to the normal lip C and the push order bell including the result of the deviation is higher than the probability of the chance eye A to the chance eye C and the cherry A. ~ It is set to be higher than the probability that a specific effect will occur triggered by a specific role such as Cherry C, Common Bell, and Watermelon. Then, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the specific effect is generated with a probability of about 5.5% (about 1 / 18.2) triggered by the normal role, whereas the specific effect is triggered by the specific role. A specific effect occurs with a probability of 0.8% (about 1/122), and in AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%, about 13.3% (about 1/152) triggered by a normal role. While the specific effect is generated with a probability, the specific effect is generated with a probability of about 1.0% (about 1/105) triggered by the specific combination.

That is, although the winning probability of the specific production lottery executed with the specific combination as the trigger is set higher than the winning probability of the specific production lottery triggered by the normal combination, the normal role is about 96. Appearance (winning) with a probability of 4% (about 1 / 1.04), and a specific role appears (winning) with a probability of about 3.56% (about 1 / 28.1) in each game. ), The probability of occurrence of a specific effect triggered by a normal role is higher than the probability of occurrence of a specific effect triggered by a specific role, and the lottery result of the game is the normal role. Even if there is, it is set so that it can be expected that a specific effect will occur.

In relation to the number of continuous games (10) of the confrontation effect in which the specific effect can occur, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the denominator (about 18.2) of the probability of occurrence of the specific effect triggered by the normal role is Although it is larger than the number of continuous games in the confrontation production, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%, the denominator (about 7.52) of the probability of occurrence of a specific role triggered by the normal role is smaller than the number of continuous games in the confrontation production. It is set to be. On the other hand, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the denominator (about 122) of the probability of occurrence of a specific effect triggered by a specific role is larger than the number of continuous games of the confrontation effect, and in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%. However, the denominator (about 105) of the probability of occurrence of the specific effect triggered by the specific role is set to be larger than the number of continuous games of the confrontation effect. Therefore, under the situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, if the continuation rate is 90% in AT mode (even if it is 60%, it is not 10%), the specific effect triggered by the normal role is On average, the probability is that it can occur at least once, whereas the specific effect triggered by a specific combination is higher when it does not occur even once, regardless of the continuation rate of the AT mode.

By doing so, it is possible to expect an additional winning even if it is a normal role, while wishing for an additional winning with a specific role as an opportunity, and even in the AT mode with a small number of games, in each game. It is possible to realize the playability that is expected to be added to the winning.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the probability of occurrence of the specific effect differs depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode. Basically, even if the lottery result of the game is the same, the higher the continuation rate, the easier it is for the specific effect to occur. It is set to be. For example, a specific effect triggered by a push order bell occurs with a probability of about 3.8% in AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, whereas it occurs with a probability of about 12.5% in AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%. It is set to occur with a probability, and the specific effect triggered by the deviation result occurs with a probability of about 13.8% in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, whereas the continuation rate is 90%. In the AT mode of, it is set to occur with a probability of about 23.5%. Therefore, the occurrence rate of the specific effect per game is about 6.3% when the continuation rate is 10%, whereas it is about 14.2% when the continuation rate is 90%, which is a high continuation rate. The AT mode of is more likely to generate a specific effect at an early stage. The probability that a specific effect will occur in the confrontation effect between 10 games is about 48.0% in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, and about 78.5 in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%. %, And it is possible to predict the continuation rate of the AT mode through the probability of occurrence of a specific effect.

After executing the specific effect lottery process in step S2105, it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the lottery process has won, and if it is determined that the lottery process has not been won, the specific effect setting process is terminated as it is. .. In this case, the normal effect is executed in the confrontation effect this time (step S2008 described later). When it is determined in step S2106 that the specific effect lottery has been won, the process of grasping the specific effect according to the value of the sub-side AT counter is executed in step S2107. Specifically, for example, if the sub-side AT counter is 1, the specific effect of displaying the character display of "VS" in red characters is grasped as the specific effect of this time, and the sub-side AT counter is set to 2 to 4. If there is, as the specific effect of this time, grasp the specific effect of displaying the color of the aura worn by the ally character in rainbow color. Then, after executing the process of setting the generated flag in step S2108, the specific effect setting process is terminated.

In the AT effect setting process, if a negative determination is made in step S2006, or after executing the specific effect setting process in step S2007, the confrontation performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in this game in step S2008. After executing the process of setting the effect, the AT effect setting process is terminated. In this case, if the specific effect is grasped in step S2107, it is set so that the confrontation effect in which the specific effect occurs is performed, and if the process of step S2107 is not performed (step S2006 or step). (When a negative determination is made in S2106), it is set so that a confrontation effect in which a normal effect occurs is performed.

By doing so, in the situation where the continuation condition is satisfied and the continuation flag is set on the main control device 101 side, a specific effect is generated in the confrontation effect of the first half part of each set in the AT mode. You will get it. Then, the occurrence of the specific effect is larger in the ratio triggered by the normal role than in the ratio triggered by the specific role, and further, the higher the continuation rate of the AT mode, the earlier the specific effect is likely to occur. Therefore, the player will proceed with the game while hoping that a specific effect will occur in the first half part of the set, and it will be possible to significantly improve the playability of the first half part.

In the AT effect setting process, when the sub-side AT counter is 7 or less in step S2004 and it is the latter half part, the process for performing the battle effect is executed. That is, in step S2009, the sub-side AT counter is 7, and it is determined whether or not it is the 11th game of the set and the 1st game of the battle effect. When the sub-side AT counter is 7, it is determined in step S2010 whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set, and if it is set, the continuation battle is performed from various table storage areas 182a in step S2011. An effect table is acquired, and a process of selecting a battle effect to be performed in this set from the acquired effect table by lottery or the like is executed.

As shown in FIG. 50, the continuation battle production table is for notifying that the ally victory effect has occurred in the final game of the set and the continuation condition has been satisfied, and the eleventh game of the set. A plurality of effect tables (PA1 to PA8) having different combinations of ally attack effects and enemy attack effects are set in the 16th game. Which effect table is selected depends on the continuation rate of the AT mode. For example, for the effect table (PA1) in which the ally attack effect occurs three times in a row, the AT mode with 10% continuation is the most. It is easy to select, and the AT mode that continues 90% is set to be the most difficult to select, and the production table (PA5) that is performed in the order of enemy attack production → enemy attack production → ally attack production is 90%. The continuous AT mode is set so that it is most easily selected, and the 10% continuous AT mode is most difficult to be selected. Then, for example, the effect table (PA7) performed in the order of ally attack effect → enemy attack effect → enemy attack effect can be selected in the AT mode of 10% continuation and the AT mode of 90% continuation, while it is 60% continuous. The effect table (PA8), which is not selected in AT mode and in which enemy attack effects occur three times in a row, is not selected in AT mode with 10% continuation and AT mode with 60% continuation, while it is selected in AT mode with 90% continuation. It is possible to predict or grasp the continuation rate of the AT mode by the selected effect table (combination and order of each attack effect). In step S2011, one effect table is selected from these continuous battle effect tables, and the process of storing the address information of the selected effect table in the address information storage area 183c is executed.

If it is determined in step S2010 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, a non-continuation battle effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a in step S2012, and the set is performed from the acquired effect table. Execute the process of selecting the battle effect by lottery or the like.

As shown in FIG. 50, the non-continuation battle production table is for notifying that the ally defeat effect has occurred in the final game of the set and the continuation condition has not been satisfied, and 11 games of the set are provided. A plurality of effect tables (PB1 to PB8) having different combinations of ally attack effect and enemy attack effect are set in the eyes to the 16th game. Which effect table is selected depends on the continuation rate of the AT mode. For example, for the effect table (PB1) in which the enemy attack effect occurs three times in a row, the AT mode of 60% continuation or 90 The% continuous AT mode is set to be easier to select than the 10% continuous AT mode, and the effect table (PB4) is performed in the order of enemy attack effect → enemy attack effect → ally attack effect. ) Is set so that the AT mode with 10% continuation is easier to be selected than the AT mode with 60% continuation or AT mode with 90% continuation. Then, for example, the effect table (PB6) performed in the order of ally attack effect → enemy attack effect → ally attack effect can be selected in the AT mode of 90% continuation, while the AT mode of 10% continuation or 60% continuation. The effect table (PB7), which is not selected in AT mode and is performed in the order of enemy attack effect → ally attack effect → ally attack effect, can be selected in AT mode with 60% continuation, while AT mode with 10% continuation or 90 The effect table (PB8), which is not selected in the% continuous AT mode and in which the ally attack effect occurs three times in a row, can be selected in the 10% continuous AT mode, while the 60% continuous AT mode and 90% continuous AT mode are selected. It is possible to predict or grasp the continuation rate of the AT mode from the selected effect table (combination and order of each attack effect), such as not being selected in the AT mode. In step S2012, one effect table is selected from these discontinuity battle effect tables, and the process of storing the address information of the selected effect table in the address information storage area 183c is executed.

Comparing the continuous battle production table and the non-continuous battle production table, for example, in the production table (PA3, PB6) performed in the order of ally attack production → enemy attack production → ally attack production, the battle production is performed by the ally victory production. When it ends, it is suggested that it is 90% continuous AT mode, while when the battle production ends with the ally defeat production, it is confirmed that it was 90% continuous AT mode, and the ally attack In the production table (PA1, PB8) where the production occurs three times in a row, if the battle production occurs in the ally victory production, the AT mode of 10% continuation is suggested, while the battle production ends in the ally defeat production. It is confirmed that the AT mode was 10% continuous, and the continuation rate is predicted and grasped not only by the combination and order of each attack effect, but also by the combination of the subsequent ally victory effect and ally defeat effect. It is possible.

In the 11th game of the set, the production table of the battle production is selected in the processing of step S2011 and step S2012, and after the address information of the selected production table is stored, in step S2013, this time. After executing the process of setting the battle effect of the game to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64, the AT effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the sub-side AT counter is not 7 in step S2009 but after the 12th game of the set, the process proceeds to step S2014. In step S2014, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set and the set address information of the battle effect is the address field information (PB1 to PB8) corresponding to the defeat effect of the ally. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S2014 means that the continuation condition is not satisfied until the battle effect is set in the 11th game, but the continuation condition is satisfied after that. In this case, in step S2015, the battle effect to be performed in this set is reselected from the continuous battle effect table, and the address information of the reselected effect table is stored (overwritten) in the address information storage area 183c. Run.

In this case, the overwriting battle effect table is selected from the continuation battle effect table according to the continuation rate of the AT mode, regardless of the ally attack effect and the enemy attack effect that have been executed in the previous games. By doing so, when the continuation condition is satisfied in the middle, the relationship between the combination of the ally attack effect and the enemy attack effect in the battle effect and the continuation rate is the case where the continuation condition is satisfied from the beginning. It will be different, the production will be diversified, the difficulty of the game for predicting the continuation rate will be improved, and the interest of the game will be improved. In this embodiment, the ally attack effect and the enemy attack effect are set as a set of two games. Therefore, for example, the above continuation condition is satisfied in the second game of the ally attack effect (enemy attack effect). Therefore, if the battle production table for overwriting is set to perform an enemy attack production (ally attack production) different from the attack production before overwriting in this game (second game), before overwriting in this game You may perform the production according to the production table of, or in this game, after performing the production according to the production table after overwriting, the enemy attack production even though the ally (enemy) launched the attack It may be set to perform a counter effect that switches to (ally attack effect).

If a negative determination is made in step S2014, or after the process of step S2015 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2013, and the battle effect of this game is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 according to the value of the sub-side AT counter. After executing the process of setting to be performed, the present AT effect setting process is terminated.

<Flow of production during AT mode>
Next, the flow of the effect in each set in the AT mode will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 54 and 55.

As shown in FIG. 54, when the AT mode is started in the game of ta1, in the first set that continues until ta5, from ta1 to ta3 (to be exact, the game immediately before the game started in ta3) The first half part in which the confrontation effect is executed, and the second half part in which the battle effect is executed from ta3 to ta5 (to be exact, the game immediately before the game started at ta5).

Further, at the start of the ta1 game, the continuous lottery process (step S904) in the continuous determination process (FIG. 31) is performed. For example, if the continuation lottery of ta1 is a continuation winning, the continuation flag is set. This continuation flag is cleared immediately before the next set continuation determination of this set, that is, in the AT mode processing of the winning result corresponding processing in the game immediately before the game started at ta5 (at ta5 in the figure). It is shown to be cleared).

When the continuation flag is set, in the first half part of ta1 to ta3, a specific effect can be generated in the confrontation effect. For example, it is assumed that the lottery result of the game is ta2, which is a normal role, and the specific effect lottery is won to generate the specific effect. In this case, the generated flag is set with the occurrence of the specific effect of the ta2, and the specific effect does not occur in the set.

In the latter half of ta3 to ta5, the battle effect is executed, and the notification (continuation notification) that the ally victory effect is executed and the continuation condition is satisfied in the final game of the battle effect is executed (ta4). ). In this case, the continuous notification makes it possible for the player to grasp the transition to the next set. However, as a player who knows that the continuation condition is satisfied by the specific production of ta3, the battle production starting from ta3 is the result (the result of whether it is a victory production or a defeat production). It is possible to enjoy while immersing yourself in a sense of superiority while knowing. Therefore, in order to enjoy the superiority complex and to be relieved to know that the continuation condition is satisfied at an early stage, we have come to not overlook the specific production, and the degree of attention to the confrontation production. Is preferably enhanced.

When the next set is started at ta5, it is assumed that the continuous lottery process is performed at the ta5 and the continuous non-winning is performed at the ta5. In this case, the continuation flag is not set. For example, if a specific role is used as an opportunity to win a game of ta6 in the first half part, the continuation flag will be set in this game of ta6.

Here, in the specific production lottery in the present embodiment, it is set to be executed according to the lottery result of the game regardless of whether or not the game is won in the additional lottery, and it is specified in the game in which the additional lottery is won. The effect may not occur. Therefore, for example, even if the continuation flag (and the sub-side continuation flag) is set in the above-mentioned additional winning ta6 and the continuation condition is satisfied, even if the specific effect does not occur, the normal combination of the subsequent ta7. In some cases, a specific effect may occur. In the figure, an example is shown in which a specific effect is generated in a ta7 game different from the additional winning ta6 game, but naturally, a specific effect is generated in the additional winning ta6 game. In some cases.

In the battle production from ta8 to ta10, since the continuation flag is set as described above, the battle production is performed in the production pattern in which the continuation notification as the ally victory production is executed at ta9 immediately before ta10. Will be.

Similarly, when the next set is started at ta10, the continuation lottery process is performed at the ta10, and if the continuation non-winning is performed at the ta10, the continuation flag is not set. Then, if the set started at the ta10 is not added to the end of the ta13 and the winning is not performed, the specific effect does not occur in the first half part of the ta10 to the ta11, and the battle effect of the ta13 to the ta13 also has the ta13. The battle effect is performed in the effect pattern in which the ally defeat effect is executed at ta12 immediately before. Then, the AT mode ends at the ta13.

Here, in the present embodiment, no specific effect is generated in the latter half part of each set, and if only the battle effect of the latter half part is viewed, it continues until the ally victory effect or the ally defeat effect is executed in the final game. It is set so that it cannot be determined whether or not the condition is satisfied. In other words, in a configuration in which a specific effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition can occur before the ally victory effect as the continuation notification for notifying that the continuation condition is satisfied is performed. , The situation in which the specific effect cannot occur (second half part) intervenes between the situation in which the specific effect can occur (first half part) and the final game in which continuous notification can occur. By doing so, the rarity of the specific effect is enhanced by limiting the situations in which the specific effect can occur, and while it is possible to draw a strong interest in the specific effect, the specific effect can be produced. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention to the battle production itself in the latter half of the part because we hope that it will occur.

As described above, the probability of occurrence of the specific effect differs depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode, and the higher the continuation rate of the AT mode, the more likely it is to occur. FIG. 55 (a) shows a 10% continuous AT mode, and FIG. 55 (b) shows a 90% continuous AT mode.

For example, in the 10% continuation AT mode started at tb1, the continuation condition is satisfied in the first set up to tb6, and the continuation condition is not satisfied in the second set from tb6 to tb10, and the second set is concerned. When the AT mode ends at, the ally victory effect as a continuous notification is executed at tb5 immediately before tb6, and the ally defeat effect is executed at tb9 immediately before tb10.

Further, for example, in the 90% continuation AT mode started at ct1, assuming that the continuation condition is satisfied in the first set up to tk6 and the second set from ct6 to ct10, immediately before ct6. At ct5 and ct9 immediately before ct10, the ally victory effect as continuous notification is executed.

As already explained, the specific effect can occur in the first half part of the set in which the continuation condition is satisfied. Therefore, in the AT mode of 10% continuation, a specific effect can occur in the games from tb1 to tb4, which are the first half parts in the first set, while in the games from tb6 to tb8, which are the first half parts in the second set. Does not occur. On the other hand, in the 90% continuous AT mode, specific effects are produced in the first half part of the game from ct1 to tk4 in the first set and the first half part of the game from ct6 to ct8 in the second set. It will be possible.

However, after the specific effect occurs, the specific effect will not occur even in the first half of the set for which the continuation condition is satisfied. Therefore, for example, from tb1 to tb4 in the AT mode of 10% continuation. When a specific effect occurs in the game of tb3, the specific effect does not occur in the games from tb3 to tb4. Further, for example, when a specific effect occurs in a game of ct2 from ct1 to ct4 in the AT mode of 90% continuation, or when a specific effect occurs in a game of ct7 from ct6 to ct8, the specific effect is started from ct2. In games from tk4 and tk7 to tk8, the specific effect will not occur.

As described above, the higher the continuation rate of the AT mode, the easier it is for the specific effect to occur. Therefore, in the tb3 game in which the specific effect occurs in the AT mode of 10% continuation, the specific effect is generated in the AT mode of 90% continuation. It tends to be a later game than the generated tc2 game. By doing so, a game that predicts the continuation rate of the AT mode from the number of games until a specific effect occurs is added, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game through diversification of how to enjoy the AT mode. Become.

Here, as described above, in each set of the AT mode, it is considered that the player proceeds with the game in the expectation that the specific effect will occur earlier. It is considered that the longer you can enjoy the excitement of enjoying whether or not a specific effect is generated, the more you can fully enjoy the game of the game. In that respect, the period during which the specific effect can be enjoyed is the period from tb1 to tb3 in the AT mode with 10% continuation, and the period from tc1 to tc2 in the AT mode with 90% continuation. The length of the period per set is longer in the AT mode with 10% continuation. By doing so, even in the AT mode having a low continuation rate, it is possible to enjoy for a longer time whether or not the above-mentioned specific effect is generated, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A specific effect corresponding to the situation where the continuation condition of the AT mode set is satisfied and the continuation condition is satisfied according to the lottery result of each game before the AT mode set is continued. The specific effect lottery for executing the above is performed, and the specific effect is performed when the specific effect lottery is won. By doing so, while attention is focused on whether or not the set will continue in each set of AT mode, a lottery for each game will be drawn by expecting that a specific effect corresponding to the continuation will be performed. Increased attention to the results.

In this case, the winning probability of the specific effect lottery differs depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode, and the higher the continuation rate, the easier it is to win the specific effect lottery. Not only does it indicate that the AT mode is being used, but it also indicates that the AT mode continuation rate is high depending on the timing of its occurrence. Therefore, it is possible to attract attention by performing a specific effect, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention of the game.

Although it is set so that it is easier to win the specific production lottery when the lottery result of the game is a specific role than when it is a normal role including a loss, the probability that the lottery result of the game will be a specific role. In addition, when the probability of becoming a normal role is taken into consideration, the normal role is triggered rather than the ratio of the specific effect being performed triggered by the specific role (the product of the winning probability of the specific role and the winning probability of the specific effect lottery at the time of the specific role). Since the ratio of the specific effect being performed (the product of the winning probability of the normal role and the winning probability of the specific effect during the normal role) is set to be larger, the lottery result of each game is the normal role. Even in a certain case, it is possible to raise expectations for the occurrence of a specific effect.

In this case, each set of the AT mode has 18 games, and among them, the number of games in which the specific effect can occur is 10 games in which the confrontation effect is performed. The denominator of the winning probability of the normal combination is set to be smaller than 10, and the denominator of the winning probability of the specific combination can be larger than 10. Because of this probability, there are not many chances to win a specific role in each set, whereas there are frequent opportunities to win a normal role, and as mentioned above, a specific effect occurs with the normal role as an opportunity. The significance of obtaining the game is enhanced, and it is possible to more preferably play the effect of increasing the attention of each game before the continuation of the set by using a specific effect.

After executing the specific effect, the generated flag is set so that the specific effect can occur only once per set, so the rarity of the specific effect is increased and the specific effect should not be overlooked. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to a specific production by utilizing the psychology of the player who is trying to do so.

Since the production mode of the specific production is different in each game in which the confrontation production is performed, there is a high possibility that the specific production will be overlooked as compared with the configuration in which the specific production is performed in the same production mode. By doing so, the degree of attention to the specific effect can be increased, and further, the degree of attention to the battle effect can be increased in the configuration in which the success or failure of the continuation condition is notified by the battle effect thereafter.

In a set for which the continuation condition is not satisfied, it is possible to establish the continuation condition by winning the additional lottery in the AT addition process according to the lottery result of each game. In this case, if the additional lottery is won, a specific effect can occur during the confrontation effect, so that the lottery result of each game can be closely related to the occurrence of the specific effect, as if it were. It is also possible to give the impression that the success or failure of the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of each game without going through the continuous lottery at the time of set update.

In the additional lottery, it is set so that the specific combination wins the additional winning, but the normal winning combination does not win the additional winning. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the set to continue even though the specific role as a so-called rare role is won, and the relationship between the specific role and the success or failure of the continuation condition can be determined. Can be secured.

However, in the present embodiment, even if the continuation condition is satisfied by the additional winning, the specific production is not performed unless the specific production lottery is won, and the execution of the specific production may be restricted at the time of the additional winning. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances that a specific effect is performed in the normal role, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game in which the normal role is won.

The winning probability of the additional lottery is common regardless of the continuation rate of the AT mode. On the premise of such a configuration, even in the AT mode in which a low continuation rate is set, the continuation condition is given as if the continuation condition is satisfied according to the lottery result of each game by a specific effect. In fact, the AT mode may be continued depending on the player's hiki, and the effect of giving the impression that the continuation condition is satisfied according to the lottery result of each game can be enhanced.

In addition, during the battle production, even if the continuation condition is satisfied by the additional winning, the specific production is not performed, so the result of the battle production performed over multiple games becomes clear in the middle. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of such an event and to appropriately secure the degree of attention to the battle production.

In the AT mode set, the specific effect corresponding to the condition that the continuation condition of the set is satisfied can be executed during the confrontation effect, and then the set is updated after the battle effect in which the specific effect cannot be executed. .. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a decrease in attention due to the overlap between the specific effect as advance notification that the continuation condition is satisfied and the battle effect that notifies the success or failure of the continuation condition, and each effect. It is possible to preferably expect the effect of the above.

In this case, in the AT effect setting process, the effect pattern of the current battle effect is determined from each battle effect table based on the success or failure of the continuation condition regardless of whether or not the specific effect is executed during the confrontation effect. .. By doing so, for example, it is not necessary to memorize the effect pattern when the specific effect is performed in advance, and for example, the specific effect is overlooked even though the specific effect is performed. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of noticing the overlooked thing in the follow-up by performing the battle effect of the effect pattern when the specific effect is performed. In this case, in order to eliminate such inconvenience, it is conceivable to take measures to make the specific effect more flashy so that the specific effect is not overlooked. If the structure is such that the effect pattern of the effect is determined, it is possible to perform the effect on the premise that the specific effect can be overlooked, and it is possible to support the improvement of the degree of attention to the specific effect.

In the continuation determination process on the main control device 101 side, only the continuation rate is referred to when updating the AT mode set, and the lottery result of the game at the time of updating is not referred to. By doing this, it is possible to make it difficult to realize that the continuous lottery is being performed when the set is updated, and it gives the impression that the continuous lottery is being performed according to the lottery results of each subsequent game. It becomes possible to help give.

<Modification example 1>
In the first embodiment described above, regardless of whether or not the game is additionally won (regardless of whether or not the game is set with the sub-side continuation flag), a specific effect is performed through a specific effect lottery. In the modified example, a configuration in which a specific effect is positively performed in the additional winning game will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the AT effect setting process in this modification.

In this modification, after executing the process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter in step S2201, it is determined in step S2202 whether or not the continuation command is received. When the continuation command is received, the process of setting the sub-side continuation flag is executed in step S2203. The processing of steps S2201 to S2203 is the same as the processing of steps S2001 to S2003. In this modification, after setting the sub-side continuation flag in step S2203, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 8 to 16, so that the second game of one set in the AT mode It is determined whether or not it is the 10th game. In the case of the second game to the tenth game, the process of setting the specific effect flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2205. The specific effect flag is a flag for generating a specific effect in the additional winning game.

If a negative determination is made in step S2202 or step S2204, or after the process of step S2205 is executed, the process for setting the effect in this game is executed in steps S2206 to S2215. The processes of steps S2206 to S2215 are the same as the processes of steps S2004 to S2013, except for the specific effect setting process of step S2209.

In the specific effect setting process in the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57, it is determined in step S2301 whether or not the generated flag is set, and if it is set, the specific effect setting process is performed as it is. To finish. If the generated flag is not set and the specific effect has not been generated in this set, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not the above specific effect flag is set. If it is not set, in steps S2303 to S2309, a process for generating a specific effect is executed. The processing of steps S2303 to S2309 is the same as the processing of steps S2102 to S2108.

If the specific effect flag is set in step S2302, the process of clearing the specific effect flag is executed in step S2310. Then, the process proceeds to step S2308, a process for grasping the specific effect corresponding to the sub-side AT counter is executed, a process for setting the generated flag is executed in step S2309, and then the specific effect setting process is terminated. do. In this case, in the setting process of the confrontation effect in step S2210, the confrontation effect corresponding to the specific effect is set.

By doing so, in a set that has not been won in the continuous lottery, if a specific role is used as an opportunity to win the game, if the game is the first half part, a specific effect will be generated in the game. Therefore, the lottery result of each game and the occurrence rate of the specific effect are more closely related, and the continuous lottery is performed based on the lottery result of each game, not the result of the continuous lottery performed when updating each set. It is possible to strengthen the impression that the game is being played, and it is also possible to strengthen the impression that the result of the continuous lottery is notified by a specific effect.

In the game in which the continuous lottery is performed, even if the additional lottery is won, the specific effect flag is not set so that the specific effect does not occur without going through the specific effect lottery. In other words, the continuation command is output even if the continuation lottery is won, but in the game where the continuation lottery is performed, even if the continuation command is received, only the sub-side continuation flag is set, and the specific effect flag is not set. I made it. In this way, the display control device 81 does not make it possible to distinguish between winning the continuous lottery of the set and winning the additional lottery, thereby avoiding an enormous number of command types. However, it is possible to perform a specific effect without contradiction with a relatively simple configuration.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, a specific effect is generated when the additional lottery is not won in the situation where the continuation condition is satisfied. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the AT addition process in this modification.

In the AT addition process in this modification, the process when it is determined in step S2404 that the addition is not won is different. That is, when a negative determination is made in step S2404, it is determined in step S2410 whether or not the continuation flag is set. When the continuation flag is set, in step S2411, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is any specific combination. If the continuation flag is not set in step S2410, or if the continuation flag is set in step S2411 but it is a normal combination, the AT addition process is terminated as it is. If the continuation flag is set and the additional lottery triggered by the specific combination is not won, in step S2412, a process of setting the non-winning command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. From, the process for adding AT is completed.

The processing of steps S2401 to S2409 is the same as the processing of steps S1001 to S1009.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a specific effect setting process in this modified example.

In this modification, if the generated flag is not set in step S2501, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the above non-winning command is received as the command at the start of this game. If the non-winning command has not been received, the processes for generating the specific effect are executed in steps S2503 to S2509. The processing of steps S2501 and S2503 to S2509 is the same as the processing of 2201 to step S2108.

On the other hand, the above non-winning command was received in step S2502, and although the continuation condition was already satisfied in the first half part of the set, the non-winning was not won in the additional lottery triggered by the specific role in this game. If the specific effect has not yet been generated, a positive determination is made in step S2502, and the process proceeds to step S2508. Then, in step S2508, a process for grasping the specific effect corresponding to the sub-side AT counter is executed, and in step S2509, a process for setting the generated flag is executed, and then the specific effect setting process is terminated. .. In this case, in the setting process of the confrontation effect in step S2210, the confrontation effect corresponding to the specific effect is set.

By doing so, it is possible to increase the chances that a specific effect is performed in the game in which the specific role is won without increasing the winning probability of the additional lottery too much. Therefore, by performing a specific effect in the game in which the specific role is won, the continuous lottery of the set can be used as a boost to give the impression that it is being performed in each game, not when the set is updated. It is possible to suitably increase the attention of each game in the set.

<Modification example 3>
In this modification, the production table of the battle production selected in the second half part may differ depending on whether or not the specific production occurs in the first half part of the set. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the AT effect setting process in this modification.

In this modification, the sub-side AT counter is 7, and the processing of the start game (11th game of the set) of the latter half part is different. That is, the processing for the first half part of steps S2601 to S2608 is the same as the processing of steps S2001 to S2008. If a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined in step S2609 whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 7 and the game is the start game of the second half part.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2609, it is determined in step S2610 whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set, and if it is set, whether or not the generated flag is set in step S2611. judge. As described above, the generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that a specific effect has occurred in the first half part of the set.

If the generated flag is not set and the specific effect does not occur even if the continuation condition is satisfied, the effect table of this battle effect is selected from the battle effect table for continuation in step S2612, and is selected. The process of storing the address information of the produced effect table is executed. This process is the same as the process of step S2011, and the effect table is selected by lottery according to the continuation rate of the AT mode this time.

On the other hand, when the generated flag is set in step S2611, the continuation condition is satisfied, and the specific effect is generated, the specific effect predetermined from the battle effect table for continuation is specified in step S2613. The production table of is selected as the production table of the battle production of this time, and the process of storing the address information of the selected production table is executed. In this modification, the effect table of the address information PA1 is set as the specific effect table, and in the battle effect after the specific effect occurs, the ally attack effect occurs three times in a row and the ally wins. The battle production of the production pattern in which the production is performed will be executed.

If the sub-side continuation flag is not set in step S2610, the process of selecting the production table of the current battle production from the non-continuation battle production table and storing the address information of the selected production table in step S2614. To execute. Further, in step S2609, when the sub-side AT counter is not 7, it is determined in step S2616 whether or not the continuation condition is satisfied after the transition to the battle production, and the continuation condition is satisfied after the fact. If there is, the process for rewriting the effect table is executed in step S2617. Then, after executing any of the processes of steps S2612 to S2614 and step S2617, or when a negative determination is made in step S2616, the setting process of the battle effect of this game is executed in step S2615, and then the present The AT effect setting process is terminated. The processing of steps S2614 to S2617 is the same as the processing of steps S2012 to S2015.

By doing this, even though the occurrence of a specific production is known, the battle production that is likely to be defeated by the ally character will not be performed, and the production will not be inconsistent. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing the battle effect because it is not necessary to select the effect pattern of the battle effect even when a specific effect is generated.

Moreover, by adopting the above configuration, when a specific effect occurs, it becomes impossible to predict the continuation rate of the AT mode from the effect pattern of the battle effect. By doing so, it becomes possible to predict the continuation rate of the AT mode purely from the occurrence timing and occurrence rate of the specific production without relying on other information such as the production pattern of the battle production. It is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the production.

<Modification example 4>
In this modification, after the specific effect is generated, the suggestion effect of the set value is generated according to the lottery result of the game. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect setting process in this modified example. Although detailed description by drawing is omitted, in this modification, the suggestion effect setting process of FIG. 61 is executed after the confrontation effect setting process of step S2008 is performed as the effect setting of the first half part in the AT effect setting process. do. That is, the suggestion effect setting process is a process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 as one process in the process for setting the effect of the first half part in the AT mode.

In the suggestion effect setting process, it is determined in step S2701 whether or not the generated flag is set. If it is not set, the suggestion effect setting process is terminated as it is. That is, in this modified example, the suggestive effect does not occur in the situation where the specific effect does not occur. If the generated flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2702.

In step S2702, the lottery result of the current game is grasped, and in step S2703, a process of grasping the set value is executed. Then, in step S2704, the continuation rate of the current AT mode is grasped, in step S2705, a process of acquiring a suggestion effect table from various table storage areas 182a is executed, and in step S2706, a suggestion effect lottery process is executed.

As shown in FIG. 62, the suggestion effect table in this modification is set so that the probability of occurrence of the suggestion effect differs depending on the set value, the continuation rate, and the lottery result of the game. Specifically, it is set so that the suggestion effect can occur when the lottery result of the game is out of order, and the suggestion effect does not occur in other results. In addition, the higher the ball output rate is set (the higher the setting), the more likely the suggestion effect is to occur, and the higher the continuation rate is, the more likely the suggestion effect is to occur. Has been done.

In addition, the suggestion effect in this modification is set as an effect suggesting a high setting as well as an effect suggesting a high continuation rate, but an effect suggesting the evenness or oddness of the set value may be provided or the value may exceed a predetermined value. An effect suggesting that it is a set value may be provided, or an effect that determines that the set value is a predetermined value (for example, setting 6) when it occurs may be provided.

After executing the suggestion effect lottery process in step S2706, it is determined in step S2707 whether or not the suggestion effect lottery has been won, and if it is won, the suggestion effect is the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S2708. After executing the process of setting to be performed by the speaker 64 or the speaker 64, the suggestion effect setting process is terminated. Although detailed description by drawing is omitted, the suggestion effect may be, for example, a mode in which the effect content of the auxiliary display unit 65 is different from that at the time of non-occurrence (for example, a predetermined character appears), or a speaker. The sound effect from 64 may be different from that at the time of non-generation (for example, a special sound effect may be generated), or a combination of these modes may be used. If it is determined in step S2707 that the player has not won, the suggestion effect setting process is terminated as it is.

In this way, by performing the specific effect, it is possible to perform the suggestion effect of the set value after that, so that the specific effect can grasp the high or low of the continuation rate and the success or failure of the continuation condition. In addition to this, it becomes an opportunity to start the suggestion effect of the set value, and the player's psychology who wants to grasp the set value can be used to improve the expectation that the specific effect is performed.

In this case, since the suggestive effect can be generated according to the lottery result of the game after the specific effect is performed, the specific effect aimed at improving the attention to the lottery result of each game is performed. Even after that, it is possible to maintain the effect of improving the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game.

Furthermore, since the suggestion effect is performed based on the result of the loss, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the number of medals held, and it is possible to dispel the negative image of the result of the loss. Since the probability of a result may be relatively high, it is possible to prevent the ball output rate from becoming too high by making it difficult for the result to come off.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, the effect content of each set in the AT mode is changed. In this modification, in the set management type AT mode in which 18 games as a predetermined number are set as one set, if the continuation condition for the next set is satisfied, a predetermined specific effect is set before 18 games are digested. If the condition for continuing to the next set is not satisfied, the AT mode ends without the specific effect occurring by the time 18 games are exhausted. In order to distinguish the specific effect in the present modification from the specific effect in the first embodiment, the specific effect in the present modification is also referred to as a second specific effect in the following description. In the following description, when the term is referred to as a specific effect (specific effect lottery, specific effect lottery process, etc.), it includes not only the specific effect in the first embodiment but also the second specific effect. This means that the same applies to the specific effects (third specific effect, fourth specific effect) in other embodiments.

Specifically, in this modification, the auxiliary display unit 65 is provided with a plurality of variable regions of the numerical characters, and the numerical characters that stop in the plurality of variable regions are in a predetermined combination to achieve the second specific effect. appear. For example, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the left variable region SP1, the medium variable region SP2, and the right variable region SP3 are set as the variable region of the numerical character in the auxiliary display unit 65 in order from the left, and these variable regions SP1 are set. As the character of the number to be displayed on ~ SP3, the character of the number from 1 to 9 is set. Then, when each game is started, the numerical characters in these variable regions SP1 to SP3 are displayed in a variable manner in the vertical direction, for example, and each time the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the numerical characters are sequentially displayed from the left. To stop. Then, when all the characters having the same number are aligned and stopped in each of the variable regions SP1 to SP3, the second specific effect is obtained (FIG. 64 (a)), and the characters of the numbers to be stopped must be aligned in each of the variable regions SP1 to SP3. For example, it is a non-second specific effect (FIG. 63 (a), FIG. 63 (b)).

When the AT mode set is started, a symbol variation effect such as variation → stop of the variation areas SP1 to SP3 is performed for each game. For example, as shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), when a numerical character stops in the variable regions SP1 to SP3 as a non-second specific effect, the next game will be performed again. A symbol variation effect is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), when the numerical character stops in the variable regions SP1 to SP3 as the second specific effect, in each of the remaining games of the set, FIG. 64 (b) shows. As shown, a jackpot production is performed. In this modified example, as a jackpot effect, an effect is set in which the appearance of a ally character raising a male bamboo shoot is displayed up on the auxiliary display unit 65. For example, a movie effect executed over a plurality of games is set. Etc. may be set, and the content of the production may be changed as appropriate.

In this modification, in a specific game (for example, from the remaining 5 games to the remaining 2 games) in which the number of remaining games in one set is small in the situation where the second specific effect is not generated, instead of the symbol variation effect. , A standby effect is performed (FIG. 65 (a)). In this modified example, as a standby effect, an effect in which a ally character is enthusiastic and wears an aura is set. That is, during the period in which the standby effect is performed, the symbol variation effect is not performed and the second specific effect and the non-second specific effect do not occur. Then, in the final game, the symbol variation effect is executed again, and if the continuation condition is satisfied, the second specific effect is generated in the final game, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the second specific effect is generated. , As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the non-second specific effect is generated in the final game, and the AT mode ends.

The above-mentioned standby effect may occur not only in a specific game in which the number of remaining games is small, but also in the middle of a set when a predetermined generation lottery is won. In this case, a standby effect is generated over a predetermined number of games (for example, 4 games) from the game won in the generated lottery, and then the symbol variation effect is executed. In this case, in the symbol variation effect after the predetermined number of games, even if the continuation condition is satisfied, the second specific effect does not occur unless the lottery for generating the second specific effect is won.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for generating such a second specific effect will be described.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the AT effect setting process in this modification.

In step S2801, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter is executed. In step S2802, the display of the number of remaining games in the set to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated in accordance with the update of the AT counter on the sub side. Specifically, in this modification, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, in a predetermined area (for example, upper right) in the auxiliary display unit 65, the number of remaining games image GP corresponding to the number of remaining games in each set is displayed. It is configured to be displayed, and in step S2802, a process of updating the remaining game number image GP according to the value of the sub-side AT counter is performed.

In the following step S2803, it is determined whether or not a continuation command is received as a command at the start of this game, and if it is received, a process of setting the sub-side continuation flag is executed in step S2804. .. If a negative determination is made in step S2803, or after the process of step S2804 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2805.

In step S2805, it is determined whether or not the generated flag is set. If the generated flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2805, and by determining whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 1 to 4, the 14th to 17th games of the set (5 games remaining to 2 games remaining) are set. It is a game), and it is determined whether or not the situation is such that the standby effect should be executed during a specific period in which the number of remaining games in the above set is small. If the sub-side AT counter is 5 or more (before the 13th game) or the sub-side AT counter is 0 (final game), whether or not the standby effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S2806. Is determined. The standby effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the game should execute the standby effect other than the above-mentioned specific period, and is a flag set when the lottery for generating the standby effect is won. If the standby effect flag is not set, the second specific effect setting process is executed in step S2807, and then the AT effect setting process ends. If the sub-side AT counters are 1 to 4 or the standby effect setting flag is set, the standby effect setting process is executed in step S2808, and then the AT effect setting process ends. Then, when it is determined in step S2804 that the generated flag is set, the process of setting the jackpot effect (FIG. 64 (b)) to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S2809. After that, the AT effect setting process is terminated.

<Second specific effect setting process>
In the second specific effect setting process, as shown in FIG. 67, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S2901. In the following step S2902, a process of grasping the continuation rate of the AT mode this time is executed. Then, in step S2903, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set, and if it is set, the sub-side AT counter is 0 in step S2904, and this game is set. Determine if it is the final game.

If it is not the final game of the set, the process proceeds to step S2904, and it is determined whether or not the generation standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The generation standby flag is a flag that is set when the generation lottery of the second specific effect is won while the standby effect is being executed. If the generation standby flag is not set, the process of acquiring the second specific effect table from the various table storage areas 182a is executed in step S2906, and the second specific effect lottery process is executed in step S2907. As shown in FIG. 69, in the second specific effect table, the winning probability of the second specific effect lottery is determined by the lottery result of each game and the continuation rate of the AT mode, as in the specific effect table of FIG. Therefore, it is set so that not only the specific role but also the normal role including the result of the loss can be won in the second specific production lottery.

After executing the second specific effect lottery process in step S2907, it is determined in step S2908 whether or not the second specific effect lottery has been won. If it is determined in step S2904 that it is the final game of the set, if it is determined that the second specific production lottery has been won in step S2908, or if the occurrence standby flag is set in step S2904. After the determination is made and the generation standby flag is cleared in step S2909, a process of setting the second specific effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S2910. In this case, as shown in FIG. 64A, in the symbol variation effect of this game, a second specific effect occurs in which characters having the same number are aligned and stopped in each of the variation areas SP1 to SP3. The type of numerical character to be stopped in the second specific effect is randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, for example, the characters of the numbers that are easily selected differ depending on the value of the AT set counter (the number of remaining continuous sets). For example, if the AT set counter is a predetermined number (for example, 2) or more, the characters of the odd numbers If the number of AT set counters is less than a predetermined number, even-numbered characters may be aligned and stopped. Further, for example, the characters with numbers that are easy to be selected are made different according to the continuation rate of the AT mode. For example, if the continuation rate of the AT mode is a predetermined rate (for example, 60%) or more, odd-numbered characters are aligned. If the AT set counter is less than a predetermined rate, even-numbered characters may be aligned and stopped. Further, the characters with numbers that are easy to be selected are made different according to the set value set in the setting process of the winning probability. For example, if the set value is a predetermined value (for example, setting 3) or more, an even number character is used. If the set value is less than a predetermined number, the characters of even numbers may be stopped together. Moreover, you may combine these.

After that, the generated flag is set in step S2911, and then the second specific effect setting process is terminated. By setting the generated flag, in the AT effect setting process of the next game, an affirmative determination is made in step S2804, and the process for setting the jackpot effect in step S2808 is performed. When the second specific effect set as described above is the final game of the set, the next game is the first game of the updated set, and the symbol variation effect is started again.

If it is determined in step S2903 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, or if it is determined in step S2908 that the second specific effect lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2912. In step S2912, a process of setting the non-second specific effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), in the symbol variation effect of this game, a non-second specific effect in which characters having the same number are not aligned in the fluctuation areas SP1 to SP3 is stopped. appear. The numerical characters that stop in each of the variable regions SP1 to SP3 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, in order to maintain the expectation that the second specific effect will occur until the end of the game, the characters of the numbers that stop in the left fluctuation region SP1 and the middle fluctuation region SP2 are the same, and the right fluctuation region SP3 In the out-of-reach mode (FIG. 63 (a)) in which the characters of the numbers stopped at are different, the mode of the disparity in which the characters of the numbers stopped in all the variable regions SP1 to SP3 are different (FIG. 63 (FIG. 63)). It is preferable to make it easier to select than b)).

In the following step S2913, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is larger than 10 and it is the 1st to 7th games of the set. If it is up to the 7th game, the waiting effect generation lottery process is executed in step S2914. In the standby effect generation lottery process, the standby effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a, and whether or not to generate the standby effect is determined by lottery according to the lottery result of the current game. As shown in FIG. 69, the standby effect table is set so that the more difficult the lottery result of the game is to win, the easier it is to win the standby effect lottery. However, it can be said that it is set not to win in the regular role.

In step S2915, it is determined whether or not the standby effect lottery has been won. If the user has won, in step S2916, the process of inputting 4 to the standby effect counters provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed, and in step S2917, the process of setting the standby effect flag is executed. , The second specific effect setting process is terminated. The value input in step S2916 corresponds to the number of games in which the standby effect is performed. In step S2913, if the standby effect lottery is won, whether or not there are enough games left to execute the standby effect. Is judged.

Then, by setting the standby effect flag in step S2917, in the AT effect setting process of the next game, an affirmative determination is made in step S2806, and the standby effect setting process of step S2808 is performed. If the eighth game or later is performed in step S2913, or if the standby effect lottery is not won in step S2915, the second specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

<Standby effect setting process>
Next, the standby effect setting process in step S2808 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 68.

In step S3001, the lottery result of the current game is grasped, and in step S3002, a process of grasping the continuation rate of the current AT mode is executed. Then, in step S3003, it is determined whether or not the standby effect counter is larger than 0, and if it is larger than 0, that is, the standby effect set in this game wins the standby effect lottery. In the case of the standby effect, the process of subtracting 1 from the standby effect counter is executed in step S3004. Then, it is determined in step S3005 whether or not the standby effect counter becomes 0, and if it becomes 0, the process of clearing the standby effect flag is executed in step S3006.

If a negative determination is made in step S3005, or after the process of step S3006 is executed, it is determined in step S3007 whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set, and if it is set, step S3008 is determined. Determines whether or not the above generation standby flag is set. If the generation waiting flag is not set, the process of acquiring the second specific effect table is executed in step S3009, and the second specific effect lottery process is executed in step S3010. The processing of step S3009 and step S3010 is the same as the processing of step S2906 and step S2907.

After executing the process of step S3010, in step S3011, it is determined whether or not the second specific effect lottery has been won, and if it has been won, the process of setting the occurrence standby flag in step S3012 is performed. Run. By such processing, an affirmative determination is made in step S2905, and the second specific effect is generated in the first game after the execution of the AT mode set final game and the standby effect based on winning the standby effect lottery. become.

When the standby effect counter is 0 in step S3003 and the standby effect set in this game is a standby effect triggered by the number of remaining games in the set being small, or in step S3007, the sub side When the continuation flag is not set, when the occurrence standby flag is set in step S3008, when it is determined in step S3011 that the second specific effect lottery is not won, and the process of step S3012 is executed. After any of the cases, the process of setting the standby effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S3013, and then the standby effect setting process ends.

That is, between the remaining 5 games to the remaining 2 games of the set, and between the 4 games after winning the standby effect generation lottery, regardless of the result of the second specific effect lottery process, the player waits instead of the symbol variation effect. The production is performed. In this case, the symbol variation effect performed in the final game of the set (the remaining one game) is the second specific effect if the continuation condition of this set is satisfied, and the non-second specific effect if the continuation condition is not satisfied. It will be a production. On the other hand, the symbol variation effect performed in the first game after the standby effect triggered by winning the standby effect generation lottery is for the total number of games including the four games in which the standby effect was executed. The second specific effect can be generated depending on the result of the second specific effect lottery, and the probability is overwhelmingly higher than the occurrence rate of the second specific effect in other games (see FIG. 69).

As described above, by configuring each game to perform a specific effect (second specific effect) in the symbol variation effect, it is more clearly notified whether or not the second specific effect has occurred in this game. It becomes an aspect, and it becomes easier to give the player the impression that the establishment of the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of each game. Therefore, the degree of attention of each game can be suitably increased.

In this case, a standby effect in which the symbol variation effect is not performed can occur, and a second specific effect lottery is also performed in the game in which the standby effect is performed, and if the second specific effect lottery is won, the second specific effect lottery is performed. Since the second specific effect is performed in the first game after the standby effect, the degree of attention to the symbol variation effect in the first game after the standby effect is dramatically increased. Moreover, even if the number of remaining games in each set is small, the standby effect is executed so that the final game of the set is the first game after the standby effect, so that it occurs in the middle of the above. In relation to the waiting effect to be obtained, we have succeeded in increasing the degree of attention to the final game of the set.

That is, the game in which the standby effect is performed is a game in which the execution of the second specific effect is restricted, and even in such a game in which the execution of the second specific effect is restricted, the second specific effect lottery itself is performed. By doing so, it is possible to make the degree of expectation that the second specific effect is generated different depending on each game in which the symbol variation effect is performed, not limited to the final game of the set.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, in the set management type AT mode in which 18 games as a predetermined number are set as one set, 10 games, which is a smaller number than the 18 games, is set as one set for the production, and the one set for the production is included. When a specific effect occurs in, the configuration is such that the set is transferred to a new set on the effect at that time. In addition, in order to distinguish the specific effect in the present embodiment from the specific effect (second specific effect) in the first embodiment, the specific effect in the present embodiment is also referred to as a third specific effect. Further, in order to distinguish the production set set for 10 games from the AT mode set set for 18 games, the AT mode set is also referred to as an AT set, and the production set is also referred to as a pseudo set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70A, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode is started, the opening effect is performed for eight games in the first AT set. As shown in FIG. 71 (a), for example, the opening effect is an effect of congratulating the start of the AT mode, and the number of games until the pseudo set is started is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Display (OP game number image OG).

When the eight games that perform the opening effect are completed, the pseudo set is started. In the pseudo set, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), using the symbol variation effect in the first embodiment, the third specific effect and the third specific effect in which characters having the same number are aligned and stopped in each variation area SP1 to SP3. An effect is performed in which one of the non-third specific effects that stops without the characters having the same number being aligned in each of the variable regions SP1 to SP3 is generated.

As shown in FIG. 70 (b1), when the effect of the pseudo set is performed, the remaining game number image GP in the first embodiment is displayed corresponding to the remaining game number of the pseudo set. For example, the remaining game number image GP in FIG. 70 (b1) shows the first game (remaining 10 games) in the pseudo set, and the display of the remaining game number image GP is updated at the start of the game.

In the effect in the pseudo set, as shown in FIG. 70 (b2), there are cases where the third specific effect occurs by the final game in which the number of remaining games image GP is 1, and as shown in FIG. 70 (b5), the remaining. Number of games The third specific effect may not occur until the final game in which the image GP becomes 1, and the non-third specific effect may be repeatedly executed.

When the third specific effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 70 (b3), an update effect indicating the transition to the next pseudo set is generated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70 (b4), after the update effect occurs, the number of remaining games in the next pseudo set is reset to 10, and the number of remaining games image GP is also displayed as 10. Further, the set number image CP indicating the number of sets of the pseudo set is also updated and displayed with a value corresponding to the number of sets of the next pseudo set (updated from 2 to 3 in the figure). In this way, if the third specific effect occurs by the final game in the pseudo set, the number of remaining games in the pseudo set is newly reset regardless of the number of remaining games in the pseudo set, and that is the third specific effect. It will be repeated as long as the production occurs.

In this case, the update effect indicating the transition to the next pseudo set described above can be said to be a continuation notification for notifying that the continuation condition of the pseudo set is satisfied. However, the continuous notification in the first embodiment is for notifying that the continuation condition of the set managed by the main control device 101 is satisfied, while the continuous notification in the present embodiment is display control. The purpose is to notify that the continuation condition of the pseudo set managed by the device 81 is satisfied, and in that respect, the continuation notification in the present embodiment can also be referred to as a pseudo continuation notification.

If the third specific effect is not generated by the final game of the pseudo set, a non-update effect indicating that the pseudo set is not updated occurs, as shown in FIG. 70 (b6). After the non-update effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 70A, the ending effect is executed for 7 games, and after the ending effect ends, the AT mode ends.

As the ending effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), an effect is set in which the face of the ally character with his eyes closed is displayed up on the auxiliary display unit 65. Also in the ending effect, the ED game number image EG is displayed corresponding to the number of remaining games in the ending effect, and the display of the ED game number image EG is updated as the game is digested.

If the continuation condition is satisfied, such as winning an additional lottery before the number of remaining games in the ending effect becomes 0, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the ally character looks at the auxiliary display unit 65. After the revival production in which the appearance of the spread is displayed, the production by the pseudo set is resumed.

Hereinafter, the processing configuration for performing each effect in the present embodiment will be described.

<Processing for precursor mode>
First, the changes in the processing on the main control device 101 side in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the precursor mode processing in the winning result handling processing is different from that of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 72, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the precursor counter becomes 0 in step S3102 and the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by winning the AT mode transition lottery in step S3104. The process for starting the AT mode is partially different. That is, the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step S3109, the AT mode flag is set in step S3110, the continuation rate of the current AT mode is set in step S3111, and then one set of AT mode is set in step S3112. The number of eye games is set to 18. Then, in the present embodiment, in step S3113, a process of adding 1 to the AT set counter is executed, and then in step S3114, a process of setting the AT start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. .. The processes of steps S3101 to S3112 and steps S3114 are the same as the processes of steps S1201 to S1213.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the set management type AT mode in which one set of 18 games is set, the continuation condition is always set for the first first set.

On the other hand, also in the present embodiment, the main control device 101 executes the process for updating the AT set (continuation determination process) every 18 games, and if the continuation condition of the AT set is satisfied, the AT is concerned. After digesting the 18 games of the set, the process for transferring to a new AT set is performed, and if the continuation condition of the AT set is not satisfied, the 18 games of the AT set are digested and then the AT mode is terminated. Perform processing (AT mode processing).

<AT production setting process>
Next, the changes in the AT effect setting process on the display control device 81 side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73.

In step S3201, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter is executed. The sub-side AT counter corresponds to the AT game counter on the main control device 101 side as in the first embodiment, and corresponds to the number of remaining games in each set on the main control device 101 side. There is. In the following step S3202, it is determined whether or not the continuation command is received as the command at the start of this game, and if it is received, the process of setting the sub-side continuation flag is executed in step S3203.

If a negative determination is made in step S3202, or after the process of step S3203 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3204. In step S3204, it is determined whether or not the sub-side set counter is 1. The sub-side set counter corresponds to the number of AT mode sets set on the main control device 101 side, as in the first embodiment, and in step S3204, the first set of AT sets is used. It is judged whether or not there is.

If it is the first set, the process proceeds to step S3205, and it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 10 to 17 and it is the first game to the eighth game of the first set in the AT mode. When the first game to the eighth game of the first set of the AT mode is executed, the process for performing the opening effect is executed in steps S3206 to S3208, and the ninth game or later of the first set of the AT mode is executed. , Step S3209 executes the process for performing the third specific effect, and then ends the AT effect setting process.

That is, in the case of the first game to the eighth game of the first set, in step S3206, the sub-side AT counter is 10, and it is determined whether or not it is the eighth game. In the eighth game, a process of setting 10 in the pseudo AT counters provided in various counter areas 183b is executed in step S3207. The pseudo AT counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the pseudo set. In step S3206, the case where the game to be started this time is the eighth game of the first set of the AT mode means that the pseudo set is started from the next game, and the process of step S3207 is the next game. This is a process for presetting the number of games in the pseudo set starting from.

If a negative determination is made in step S3206, or after the process of step S3207 is executed, the process of setting the opening effect (FIG. 71 (a)) to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step S3208. After that, the AT effect setting process is terminated. In addition, in the process for performing the opening effect, the process for updating the display of the number of games (OP game number image OG) until the start of the pseudo set is also performed based on the sub-side AT counter.

If the sub-side set counter is not 1 in step S3204 and is not the first set in AT mode, the process proceeds to step S3210. In step S3210, it is determined whether or not the ending flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The ending flag is a flag set when the number of games in the pseudo set is exhausted without the third specific effect occurring as described above and the ending effect (FIG. 71 (b)) should be performed. If the ending flag is not set, the third specific effect setting process is executed in step S3209.

On the other hand, when the ending flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3211 to determine whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set. When the ending flag is set and the sub-side continuation flag is set, the continuation condition is satisfied by winning the additional lottery on the main controller 101 side after the end of the effect by the pseudo set. Means that. If the sub-side continuation flag is not set, the process of setting the ending effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed in step S3212, and then the AT effect setting process is terminated. In addition, in the process for performing the ending effect, the process for updating the display of the number of games (ED game number image EG) until the end of the ending effect is also performed based on the sub-side AT counter.

Further, in step S3211, when it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied by winning the additional lottery on the main control device 101 side after the end of the effect by the pseudo set, the process of clearing the ending flag in step S3213 is performed. After that, in step S3214, the process of setting the revival effect (FIG. 71 (c)) to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed, and then the AT effect setting process ends.

<Third specific production setting process>
In the third specific effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 74, first, in step S3301, the process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo effect counter is executed, and in step S3302, the remaining number of games in the pseudo set is image GP. Executes the process of updating. In the following step S3303, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set.

When the sub-side continuation flag is set, in step S3304, it is determined whether or not the pseudo AT counter is 0 and the game to be started this time is the final game of the pseudo set (10th game of the pseudo set). do. If it is not the final game, the lottery result of this game is grasped in step S3305, the continuation rate of AT mode is grasped in step S3306, and the third specific production table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a in step S3307. Then, in step S3308, the third specific effect lottery process is executed. The processes of steps S3305 to S3308 correspond to the processes of steps S2102 to S2105.

As shown in FIG. 75, the third specific effect table in the present embodiment is set so that the occurrence rate of the third specific effect differs depending on the game lottery result and the continuation rate of the AT mode, and the game lottery. As a result, the more difficult it is to win, the more likely it is that the third specific effect will occur, and the higher the continuation rate of the AT mode, the more likely it is that the third specific effect will occur. In addition, as the lottery result of the game, it is set so that the third specific effect can occur not only as a specific role as a so-called rare role but also as a normal role including a missed result, and the lottery result of the game. The occurrence rate of the third specific effect according to each lottery result calculated from the product of the winning probability of the third specific effect lottery and the winning probability of the third specific effect lottery is set to be higher for the normal combination than for the specific combination. ing.

In relation to the continuation rate of the AT mode, the higher the continuation rate in each lottery result, the easier it is for the third specific effect to occur. Therefore, the higher the continuation rate, the third specific per game. The rate of occurrence of the effect is also high, and the probability that the third specific effect will occur before the final game (by the ninth game) as a pseudo set is set to be high as the continuation rate is high. In other words, the higher the continuation rate of the AT mode, the easier it is for the third specific effect to occur in the pseudo set with a smaller number of games and to move to the next pseudo set. The AT mode with a continuation rate tends to increase the number of pseudo sets. By doing so, the difference in the number of pseudo sets tends to be larger than the difference between the actual number of AT set sets when the continuation rate is high and the actual number of AT set sets when the continuation rate is low. .. Therefore, the difference in the number of pseudo sets in appearance is larger than the difference in the actual number of balls to be played (difference in the number of games and the number of sets in the AT mode actually digested) due to the high and low continuation rate of the AT mode, and the high continuation rate. It is possible to prevent the ball output rate from rising while optimizing the effect when is selected.

After executing the third specific effect lottery process in step S3308, it is determined in step S3309 whether or not the third specific effect lottery has been won. If the third specific effect lottery has been won, the process of setting the third specific effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S3310. Further, even when the sub-side continuation flag is set in step S3304 and it is determined that the game is the final game of the pseudo set, the process for performing the third specific effect is executed in step S3310.

In the following step S3311, after the third specific effect set in step S3310, a process of setting the update effect (FIG. 70 (b3)) to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. Then, in step S3312, the process of inputting 10 to the pseudo AT counter is executed, and then the third specific effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3303 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3313. In step S3313, the sub-side AT counter is 17, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is a game updated to a new set on the main control device 101 side (the first game of the AT set). If it is not a new set update game, the process of setting the non-third specific effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S3314. Then, in step S3315, the pseudo AT counter is 0, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is the final game of the pseudo set (the tenth game of the pseudo set). In the case of the final game, in step S3316, after the non-third specific effect set in step S3314, the non-update effect (FIG. 70 (b6)) is set to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. Execute the process to be performed. Then, after executing the process of setting the ending flag in step S3317, the third specific effect setting process is terminated. By setting the ending flag, an affirmative determination will be made in step S3210 from the next game, and the ending effect will be performed. If it is not the final game of the pseudo set in step S3315, the third specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

Here, a case will be described in which an affirmative determination is made in step S3313 and it is determined that the first game of the AT set is in a situation where the sub-side continuation flag is not set. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3310 to execute the setting process for generating the third specific effect. That is, when the main control device 101 is not elected in the continuous lottery performed when updating the AT mode set, the third specific effect is generated in the game. Then, the third specific effect is generated in the first game of the final set of the AT mode (the set that is not won in the continuous lottery), and the pseudo set is started from the second game of the final set. Then, the non-third specific effect is executed over 10 games in the pseudo set, and the non-update effect is performed after the non-third specific effect in the 11th game of the AT set, which is the final game of the pseudo set. After that, the ending effect is executed from the 12th game to the 7th game of the AT set, and the AT mode ends. By doing so, regardless of the number of games in each set of the AT mode on the main control device 101 side, the pseudo set is updated by the production, but the third specification is made in the final set of the AT mode. It is possible to perform a pseudo set that does not generate an effect.

<Update of AT mode set and update of pseudo set>
A state in which the AT mode set is updated on the main control device 101 side and a state in which the pseudo set is updated on the display control device 81 side will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 76.

When the AT mode is started at td1, in the first set of the AT mode from the td1, the opening effect is performed up to the seventh game (the remaining 12 games), td2. Then, a pseudo set effect is performed from td3, which is the eighth game (the remaining 11 games) in the first set.

As already explained, in the situation where the continuation flag (sub-side continuation flag) is set, in the pseudo-set effect, the lottery result of the game is irrespective of the number of remaining games in one set managed by the main control device 101 side. If the third specific effect is generated according to the continuation rate of the AT mode and the third specific effect is not generated until the number of remaining games in the pseudo set managed by the display control device 81 becomes 0, the lottery result of the game is obtained. And the third specific effect occurs regardless of the continuation rate of the AT mode.

For example, in the first set of AT mode started from td1, when the third specific effect occurs in the game of td4 before the number of remaining games in the pseudo set becomes 0, the pseudo set is performed through the update effect. Will be updated. Then, from the next game, td5, the next pseudo set is started as the remaining 10 games. Then, when the number of remaining games in the AT mode started from td1 becomes 0 at td6, since the continuation flag is set, the set update process (step S1404 to step S1406) is executed, and the next The second set starts from the td7 game. Then, a continuous lottery is executed when the set is updated at the td7, and for example, when the continuous lottery executed at the td7 is won, the continuation flag is set again.

Further, for example, in the second set of the AT mode starting from td7, if the third specific effect does not occur until the number of remaining games in the second set of the pseudo set becomes 0, the number of remaining games is 0. The third specific effect occurs at td8. Then, the third set of the pseudo set is started from the next td9 game.

Similarly, when the number of remaining games in the second set of the AT mode started from td7 becomes 0, the continuation flag is set, so the process for updating the set is performed as described above, and td10 The third set will start at. Then, if the continuation lottery held at the td10 is also won, the continuation flag is set again.

In the pseudo set effect on the display control device 81 side, an effect (third specific effect) of updating the pseudo set at any time is generated as described above until the continuous lottery on the main control device 101 side is not won, and the pseudo set effect is generated. To continue.

In td11 where the number of remaining games in the third set of the AT mode started from td10 becomes 0, the process for updating the set is performed again. However, in td12 when the next 4th set is started, if the continuous lottery is not won, the continuation flag is not set.

In this case, the display control device 81 generates the third specific effect by the pseudo set effect in the td12 which is the start game of the fourth set in the AT mode. Then, a new pseudo set (7th set) is started from td13, which is the next game of the game of td12 that generated the third specific effect. In the pseudo set of the seventh set, the non-third specific effect occurs over 10 games, and the pseudo set of the seventh set continues until td14 of the eleventh game in the fourth set of the AT mode. In this case, the non-update effect is generated at td14, and the ending effect is performed from td15, which is the next game of the game. The ending effect continues for 7 games, and ends with the AT mode at td16 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the set management type AT mode, the pseudo set effect is performed over 10 games, which is shorter than the 18 games which is the number of AT set games, and when the third specific effect occurs during the pseudo set effect, the pseudo set effect is performed. Changed to move to a new pseudo set regardless of the number of games remaining in the set. By doing so, the pseudo set effect is performed with a number of repetitions larger than the number of repetitions of the AT set, and the final AT mode is expected while expecting the effect of giving the impression that the AT mode continues for a long time. It is possible to match the game with the end of the pseudo set production.

More specifically, the number of remaining games in AT mode is 18 games, which is more than 10 games, which is the number of continuous games of the pseudo set effect (the first game of the AT set for which the continuation condition is not satisfied, and the rest is the pseudo set. The number of games is less than twice that of 10 games), and the third specific effect is generated to update the pseudo set. By doing so, if the third specific effect is not generated in the updated pseudo set, it is possible to end the pseudo set effect when the number of remaining games in the AT mode reaches eight games. Become. In this case, in the present embodiment, the ending effect is performed during the remaining 7 games, and the end game of the AT mode and the end game of the pseudo set effect can be adjusted without discomfort.

In the AT set for which the continuation condition is satisfied, the number of games for performing a new pseudo set is secured regardless of which game the pseudo set is updated. Therefore, in the AT set in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the third specific effect is generated through the third specific effect lottery process, so that the timing at which the third specific effect occurs during the pseudo set effect (pseudo set). It is possible to generate randomness in the game in which the update is performed), and it is possible to preferably enhance the effect of the pseudo-set effect.

In this case, the success or failure of the continuation condition of the AT mode is performed on the main control device 101 side, and the pseudo set effect is performed on the display control device 81 side. The configuration is such that the success or failure of the continuation condition is grasped and whether the third specific effect is randomly generated by the pseudo set effect or the third specific effect is generated when the AT set is updated is different. By doing so, while managing the presence or absence of continuation of the AT mode and decentralizing the functions as a configuration in which the production during the AT mode is handled by separate control devices, the game ends the AT mode well. It is possible to adjust the end game of the pseudo set production.

In particular, since the determination on the display control device 81 side whether or not to generate the third specific effect without going through the third specific effect lottery process is the first game of the AT set, the determination is 1 in 18 games. The structure is such that it only needs to be performed once. Therefore, it is possible to expect an overwhelming effect of reducing the processing load as compared with a configuration in which the determination is made for each game.

Also in this embodiment, the third specific effect lottery is performed according to the lottery result of each game and the continuation rate of the AT mode. Therefore, since the lottery result of each game and the occurrence of the third specific effect are linked, the player can obtain the satisfaction of generating the third specific effect by his / her own hiki, and the third specific effect can be obtained. It is also possible to perform a game in which the continuation rate of the AT mode is predicted from the occurrence rate of the specific effect, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the occurrence of the third specific effect.

<Modification example 1>
In this modification, the AT mode set update game (the first game of the AT set) is configured so that the third specific effect is more likely to occur than the other games. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a third specific effect setting process in this modification.

In the third specific effect setting process in this modification, the sub-side continuation flag is set (step S3403: YES), and the content of the third specific effect lottery when it is not the final game of the pseudo set is different. Specifically, after grasping the lottery result of this game and the continuation rate of the AT mode (step S3405, step S3406), the sub-side AT counter is 17 in step S3407, and the game to be started this time is AT. Determine if it is the first game of a set of modes. If it is not the first game, the third specific effect table is acquired in step S3408, and the third specific effect lottery process is executed in step S3410. The third specific effect table is the same as that of the second embodiment (FIG. 75). On the other hand, in the case of the first game of the AT mode set, after acquiring the third specific effect table at the time of update from the various table storage areas 182a in step S3409, the third specific effect lottery process is performed in step S3410. To execute.

At the time of update, as shown in FIG. 78, as shown in FIG. 78, the occurrence rate of the third specific effect is set according to the lottery result of the game and the continuation rate of the AT mode, as in the third specific effect table. However, when comparing the lottery results of the same game and the continuation rate of the same AT mode, the third specific effect table at the time of update is more likely to generate the third specific effect than the third specific effect table. It is set. For example, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, in the case of normal lip A, the third specific effect is generated with a probability of 2.0% in the third specific effect table, while 6 in the third specific effect table at the time of update. There is a 0.0% chance that the third specific effect will occur.

After executing the third specific effect lottery process in step S3410, it is determined in step S3411 whether or not the generated lottery has been won, and if so, the process proceeds to step S3412 to perform the third specific effect. Is performed. If the player has not won, the process proceeds to step S3416 to perform a process for generating a non-third specific effect. The processes of steps S3401 to S3406 and steps S341 to S3419 are the same as the processes of steps S3301 to S3317.

As described above, on the premise that the third specific effect is generated in the first game of the AT set for which the continuation condition is not satisfied and the pseudo set is updated, the AT set for which the continuation condition is satisfied By configuring the configuration so that the third specific effect is likely to occur even in the first game, it is difficult to grasp that the third specific effect occurs in the first game of the AT set as a sign that the continuation condition is not satisfied. It becomes possible to camouflage the third specific effect of the first game of the AT set for which the continuation condition is not satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the success or failure of the continuation condition on the AT set side, and to enjoy the pseudo-set effect more purely.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, the number of games for which the ending effect is performed is uniformly set to a predetermined number (7), but this is changed in this modification. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a third specific effect setting process in this modification.

In this modification, the processing when it is determined in step S3503 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set is different. That is, when a negative determination is made in step S3503, it is determined in step S3513 whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 17 and it is the first game in the AT mode set. In the case of the first game, in step S3514, it is determined whether or not the pseudo AT counter is smaller than 7, and it is the fourth game or later of the pseudo set. If it is the fourth game or later, the process proceeds to step S3510 to execute the process for performing the third specific effect. When the game to be started this time is up to the third game of the pseudo set, the continuation rate of the AT mode is grasped in step S3515, and the set value set in the winning probability setting process is grasped in step S3516. Then, in step S3517, a process of acquiring an ending game number table from various table storage areas 182a is executed, and in step S3518, a process of determining the number of ending game games in the AT mode this time by lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 80, the ending game number table is set so that the number of ending games selected differs depending on the AT mode continuation rate and the set value, and the AT mode continuation rate is generally high. It is set so that a smaller number of ending games can be easily selected, and a higher setting value makes it easier to select a smaller number of ending games. For example, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the average number of ending games is smaller when the set value is 3 or 4 than when the set value is 1 or 2, and a shorter number of games is selected. Easy to do. Also, even in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%, the average number of ending games is smaller when the set value is 3 or 4 than when the set value is 1 or 2, and a shorter number of games is selected. Easy to do. In both cases where the set value is 1 or 2 and the set value is 3 or 4, the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90% has more ending games than the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%. The average value becomes small, and it is easy to select a short number of games.

On the other hand, when the set value is 5 or 6, for example, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the number of ending games for one game is most likely to be selected, while in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%, 7 games are most likely to be selected. The number of ending games is most likely to be selected, and the higher the continuation rate, the easier it is to select a longer number of ending games. That is, even if the number of ending games is short, the set value is not likely to be high, and the set value can be narrowed down in relation to the continuation rate of the AT mode. By doing so, the significance of predicting the continuation rate before reaching the ending is enhanced, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the third specific effect.

Here, as described above, the situation where the ending effect is performed is basically the case where the AT mode ends without satisfying the continuation condition of the set, so that the continuation rate can be grasped by the ending effect. However, it is unlikely to be useful information for the player. However, as described above, the probability of occurrence of the third specific effect differs depending on the continuation rate, and the continuation rate is configured to be predictable from the probability of occurrence of the third specific effect before the ending effect occurs. Therefore, in order to predict the set value, information on the continuation rate is required after the fact, such as predicting the set value from the continuation rate predicted before the ending effect and the number of games in the ending effect. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the third specific effect by forming the structure and making the information on the continuation rate necessary after the fact.

After performing the lottery process for the number of ending games in step S3518, the process proceeds to step S3719, the process of subtracting the number of ending games determined in step S3518 from the maximum number of ending games 7 is executed, and the calculated value thereof. Is input to the ending standby counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The ending standby counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the game that generates the third specific effect at the start of the ending effect.

After executing the process of step S3519, it is determined in step S3520 whether or not the ending standby counter is 0. For example, when the number of ending games is selected as 3 games, the value input to the ending standby counter in step S3519 is 4, and a negative determination is made in step S3520. If a negative determination is made in step S3520, the process proceeds to step S3521 to execute a process for generating a non-third specific effect. The processing of steps S3521 to S3524 is the same as the processing of steps S3314 to S3317.

If a negative determination is made in step S3513 and it is determined that the game is not the first game of the set for which the continuation condition is not satisfied, it is determined in step S3525 whether or not the generated flags are set in the various flag storage areas 183a. do. The generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the third specific effect has already been generated in the set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. If the generated flag is not set, in step S3526, the process of subtracting 1 from the ending standby counter is executed.

After executing the process of step S3526, the process proceeds to step S3520, and it is determined whether or not the ending standby counter has become 0. If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3521 and the process for generating the non-third specific effect is performed as described above. When the ending standby counter becomes 0, the process of clearing the generated flag is executed in step S3527, and then the process proceeds to step S3510 to execute the process of generating the third specific effect. The processing of steps S3501 to S3512 is the same as the processing of steps S3301 to S3312.

If the generated flag is set in step S3525 and the third specific effect has already been generated, the process proceeds to step S3521 to execute a process for generating a non-third specific effect.

As described above, by setting the number of ending games to a variable type instead of a fixed type of 7 games, the game that generates the third specific effect in the AT set for which the continuation condition is not satisfied is the first game of the AT set. It is not limited to, but is random. By doing so, it becomes more difficult to grasp whether or not the AT set is continued from the update timing of the pseudo set, and it is possible to enhance the effect of enjoying the pseudo set effect.

Moreover, in the above configuration, since the set value can be estimated based on the number of ending games, not only the disappointment that the AT mode ends when the ending effect is performed, but also the prediction of the set value can be predicted. It is possible to provide fun to perform, and it is possible to suitably compensate for the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In this case, since the setting value can be estimated and narrowed down not only from the number of ending games but also from the continuation rate of the AT mode, the AT mode is continued before the ending effect is performed. The importance of predicting and grasping the rate will be increased, and it will be possible to draw more attention to the occurrence of the third specific effect.

<Modification example 3>
In this modification, the probability of occurrence of the third specific effect is changed. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a third specific effect table in this modified example.

The third specific effect table in this modification is set so that the higher the continuation rate of the AT mode is, the less likely the third specific effect is to occur, and the lower the continuation rate is, the more likely the third specific effect is to occur. Specifically, when the lottery results of each game are taken into consideration, under the situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, it occurs with a probability of about 71.5% per game, and 90%. In the AT mode of the continuation rate of, it occurs with a probability of about 1.5% per game. Under the condition that the continuation condition is satisfied, the pseudo set continues up to 10 games, but in the AT mode with 10% continuation, about 1.4 games continue, and in the AT mode with 90% continuation, about 9.3 games. Continuing, the lower the continuation rate of AT mode, the smaller the number of games per set of pseudo sets.

Further, as already described, in the present embodiment, a pseudo-set effect in which 10 games are set as one set is performed, and when a third specific effect occurs between the 10 games, a new pseudo-set is performed regardless of the number of remaining games. Will be updated to. That is, the more likely the third specific effect is to occur, the higher the probability of updating the pseudo set.

The average number of continuous sets in AT mode is about 2.1 sets in AT mode with 10% continuation, about 7.9 sets in AT mode with 90% continuation, and AT with 90% continuation. The mode continues for 3.7 times as many sets as the AT mode with 10% continuation. On the other hand, in the pseudo set, the update probability of the pseudo set is higher in the AT mode with 10% continuation as described above, and the average value of the number of pseudo sets is in the AT mode with 10% continuation. Continues about 4.4 sets and continues about 6.8 sets in 90% continuous AT mode. Therefore, the 90% continuation AT mode has 1.5 times the pseudo set of the 10% continuation AT mode, and the continuation rate in the number of pseudo sets is larger than the difference in the continuation rate in the actual number of AT mode sets. The difference is smaller.

Further, in the AT mode of 60% continuation, about 3.5 sets are continued, so that the AT mode of 60% continuation has a smaller average number of sets than the AT mode of 90% continuation. However, as the average value of the pseudo set, about 9.0 sets continue in the AT mode of 60% continuation, and about 6.8 sets continue in the AT mode of 90% continuation, so that the AT mode of 60% continuation is The number of pseudo sets is larger than that of the 90% continuous AT mode. That is, the average number of AT sets and the average number of pseudo sets according to the continuation rate are reversed, and the lower the continuation rate, the larger the average number of pseudo sets may be.

The relationship between the AT mode continuation rate and the pseudo-set update probability will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 (a) shows an example of a pseudo-set effect in a 10% continuous AT mode, and FIG. 82 (b) shows an example of a pseudo-set effect in a 90% continuous AT mode. There is.

For example, in the AT mode of 10% continuation, the first set is started at te1 and the pseudo set effect is started from te2 at which the opening effect ends. In this case, although the continuation condition is satisfied in the first set of the AT mode started in the te1 and the second set of the AT mode started in the te5, the AT mode 3 started in the te11 It is assumed that the continuation condition is not satisfied in the set eye, and the AT mode ends at te13 after the ending effect started at te12.

As described above, in the AT mode of 10% continuation, if the continuation condition is satisfied, the third specific effect occurs with a probability of about 71.5% for each game. In the figure, from te2. After the first set of the pseudo set effect is started, the third specific effect is generated in te3 to te11, and after the pseudo set of 10 sets is performed, the ending effect is generated.

On the other hand, in the AT mode of 90% continuation, the first set is started at tf1, and the pseudo set effect is started from tf2 at which the opening effect ends. In this case, the first set of AT mode started at tf1, the second set of AT mode started at tf4, the third set of AT mode started at tf7, and tf11 are started. Although the continuation condition is satisfied in the 4th set of the AT mode, the continuation condition is not satisfied in the 5th set of the AT mode started at tf14, and the ending effect started at tf15 is changed to tf16. And the AT mode ends.

As mentioned above, in the 90% continuation AT mode, if the continuation condition is satisfied, the probability is lower than the 10% continuation AT mode, and there is a probability of about 1.5% for each game. Where the effect is generated, in the figure, after the first set of the pseudo set effect is started from tf2, the third specific effect is generated at tf3, tf5, tf6, tf8 to tf10, and tf12 to tf14, and 10 sets. It shows that the ending effect occurred after the pseudo set of.

That is, in this case, the actual number of sets in the AT mode with 10% continuation is 3 sets, and the actual number of sets in the AT mode with 90% continuation is 5 sets, whereas the actual number of sets in the AT mode with 10% continuation is 5 sets. The number of sets of pseudo sets is 10 sets, and the number of sets of pseudo sets in AT mode with 90% continuation is also 10 sets. It becomes possible to give to a person.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when a specific effect occurs in the pseudo set effect in the second embodiment, the jackpot effect is executed over a predetermined number of games (4 games to 14 games), and then again. Pseudo set production is performed. Then, when the specific effect does not occur in the pseudo set effect, the AT mode ends when the specified number of games (10 games) of the pseudo set effect is exhausted. In addition, in order to distinguish the specific effect in this embodiment from the specific effect in other embodiments, the specific effect in this embodiment is also referred to as a fourth specific effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83A, in the embodiment, when the AT mode is started, it is simulated from the start of the AT mode without going through the opening effect as in the second embodiment. The set production is started.

The pseudo-set effect continues for a maximum of 10 games as in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83 (b1), similarly to the second embodiment, the fourth specific effect and each variation area in which characters having the same number are aligned and stopped in each variation area SP1 to SP3 by using the symbol variation effect. An effect in which any of the non-fourth specific effects in which characters having the same number are not aligned in SP1 to SP3 is generated is performed.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b2), the fourth specific effect is generated by the final game in which the number of remaining games image GP is 1, and the jackpot effect is performed as shown in FIG. 83 (b3). As the jackpot effect, for example, an effect in which the appearance of a ally character closing his eyes is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is set, and continues for a minimum of 4 games and a maximum of 14 games. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (b4), when the effect of displaying the appearance of the ally character opening his eyes is performed as the transition effect in the final game of the jackpot effect, the pseudo set effect starts again from the next game. Will be done.

In the pseudo-set effect, when the non-fourth specific effect is performed over ten games, as shown in FIG. 83 (b5), after the non-fourth specific effect of the final game, which is the tenth game, FIG. 83 ( As shown in b6), the non-update effect is performed and the AT mode ends.

<AT production setting process>
FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the AT effect setting process in the present embodiment.

After subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter in step S3601, it is determined in step S3602 whether or not the continuation command is received. When the continuation command is received, the process of setting the sub-side continuation flag is executed in step S3603. If a negative determination is made in step S3602, or after the process of step S3603 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3604.

In step S3604, the sub-side AT counter is 17, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is the first game in the AT mode set. In the case of the first game of the AT set, it is determined in step S3605 whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set, and if it is not set, the adjustment process is executed in step S3606, and then the adjustment process is executed. This AT effect setting process ends. The adjustment process is a process for adjusting the number of games between the pseudo set effect and the jackpot effect being executed at the start of the AT set for which the continuation condition is not satisfied, and the details will be described later.

If it is not the first game of the set in step S3604, or if the sub-side continuation flag is set even in the first game of the AT set in step S3605, the process proceeds to step S3607. In step S3607, it is determined whether or not the adjusted flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The adjusted flag is a flag that is set when the adjustment process of step S3606 is performed.

If the adjusted flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3608 to determine whether or not the jackpot effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The jackpot effect flag is a flag that is set when the jackpot effect is started, and is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the jackpot effect is in progress. When the jackpot effect flag is not set and the pseudo set effect is performed instead of the jackpot effect, the fourth specific effect setting process is executed in step S3609, and then the AT effect setting process ends.

<4th specific effect setting process>
In the fourth specific effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 85, a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo AT counter is executed in step S3701, and a process of updating the remaining number of games image GP is executed in step S3702. Then, it is determined in step S3703 whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set, and if it is set, the pseudo AT counter is 0 in step S3704, and the game to be started this time is a pseudo set. It is determined whether or not it is the 10th game of. If it is not the 10th game of the pseudo set, in steps S3705 to S3708, a process of determining whether or not to generate the fourth specific effect is executed according to the lottery result of this game and the continuation rate of the AT mode. do. The processing of steps S3701 to S3708 is the same as the processing of steps S3301 to S3308, and the third specific effect table of FIG. 75 can be diverted to the fourth specific effect table.

In step S3709, it is determined whether or not the fourth specific effect lottery performed in step S3708 has been won. If the 4th specific effect lottery is won, or if it is determined in step S3604 that it is the final game of the pseudo set, the 4th specific effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step S3710. The process of setting the speaker is performed (FIG. 83 (b2)). Then, after executing the jackpot effect game number setting process in step S3711, the fourth specific effect setting process ends.

<Processing for setting the number of jackpot production games>
In the jackpot effect game number setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 86, a process of acquiring a jackpot game number table from various table storage areas 182a is executed in step S3801. In the jackpot game number table, as shown in FIG. 88, one of 4 games to 14 games is set to be selected according to the set value set in the winning probability setting process. The higher the ball output rate is set, the easier it is to select a short game number jackpot effect.

After acquiring the jackpot game number table in step S3801, the number of games for which the jackpot effect is to be produced in step S3802 is determined by lottery. Then, in step S3803, the process of inputting the lottery result to the jackpot effect counter 1 provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed, and then in step S3804, the process of setting the jackpot effect flag is executed. , This jackpot production game number setting process ends. By setting the jackpot effect flag, affirmative judgment is made in step S3608 from the next game.

In the fourth specific effect setting process, if it is determined in step S3709 that the fourth specific effect lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S3712 so that the non-fourth specific effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. The process of setting to is performed (FIG. 83 (b1)). Then, in step S3713, the pseudo AT counter is 0, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is the 10th game of the pseudo set. If it is the 10th game, AT ends in step S3714. A process for setting the effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed (FIG. 83 (b6)). If it is not the 10th game of the pseudo set, the fourth specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S3608 that the jackpot effect flag is set in the AT effect setting process, the process proceeds to step S3610. In step S3610, the process of subtracting 1 from the jackpot effect counter is executed. Then, in step S3611, a process of adding 1 to the jackpot effect counter 2 provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The jackpot effect counter 2 is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games in which the jackpot effect is executed. In the following step S3612, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect counter 1 is set to 0. If it is not 0, in step S3613, after performing the process of setting the jackpot effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 (FIG. 83 (b3)), the AT effect setting process is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, if the jackpot effect counter 1 becomes 0 in step S3612 and the final game of the jackpot effect is the final game, the process proceeds to step S3614 to execute the process of clearing the jackpot effect flag, and the jackpot effect counter 2 in step S3615. Is executed to clear to 0. Then, in step S3616, a process of inputting 10 to the pseudo AT counter is executed, and in step S3617, a process of setting the transition effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed (FIG. 83 (FIG. 83). b4)), the present AT effect setting process is terminated.

<Adjustment processing>
Next, the adjustment process of step S3606, which is performed in the first game of the AT set for which the continuation condition is not satisfied, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87.

In step S3901, the jackpot effect counter 1 is larger than 0, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect is planned to be performed in this game. When the jackpot effect counter 1 is 0 and a pseudo set effect is planned to be performed, a process of setting the fourth specific effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed in step S3902 (FIG. FIG. 83 (b2)). Then, in step S3903, the jackpot effect flag is set, and in step S3904, the process of setting 7 in the jackpot effect counter 1 is executed, and then this adjustment process ends. The process of step S3902 to step S3904 corresponds to the process of step S3710, step S3803 and step S3804. That is, by performing the processes of steps S3902 to S3904, the fourth specific effect is generated in the game started this time, and the jackpot effect between the next game and the seven games is performed. In this case, the game in which the jackpot effect is completed and the transition effect is performed is the 8th game in the final set of the AT mode, and the 9th to 18th games are pseudo-set effects by the non-fourth specific effect. It will be done (see FIG. 89 (a)).

More specifically, from the second game of the final set to the eighth game of the final set, which is the next game, the jackpot effect or the jackpot effect or by determining that the jackpot effect flag is set in step S3608 in the AT effect setting process. Processing for setting the transition effect is performed. Then, in the ninth and subsequent games of the final set, since the jackpot effect flag is cleared, a negative determination is made in step S3608, and the fourth specific effect setting process is performed. In the fourth specific effect setting process, it is determined in step S3703 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, and the process proceeds to step S3715. Then, it is determined in step S3715 whether or not the adjusted flag is set, and since it is not set, the process proceeds to step S3712 and the process for performing the non-fourth specific effect is executed.

If the jackpot effect counter 1 is larger than 0 in step S3901 and the game is scheduled to perform a jackpot effect, it is determined in step S3905 whether or not the jackpot effect counter 2 is 7 or more. When the jackpot effect counter 2 is less than 7, and the number of games of the jackpot effect already executed is 6 games or less, 1 is input to the jackpot effect counter 2 in step S3906, and the jackpot effect counter 2 is in step S3907. The process of inputting 8 to 1 is executed. Then, in step S3908, after performing the process of setting the jackpot effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 (FIG. 83 (b3)), the present adjustment process is terminated. That is, by executing the processes of steps S3906 to S3908, the jackpot effect is executed from the game started this time to eight games. As described above, the case where the processes of steps S3906 to S3908 are executed is the case where the jackpot effect is planned to be performed in this game, and the case where the jackpot effect is 6 games or less after the start of the jackpot effect. By performing the processes of steps S3906 to S3908, the jackpot effect is executed from 8 games to 14 games in total. In this case, the game in which the jackpot effect is completed and the transition effect is performed is the 8th game in the final set of the AT mode, and the 9th to 18th games are pseudo-set effects by the non-fourth specific effect. (See FIG. 89 (b)).

More specifically, as in the case of performing the process of step S3904, the jackpot effect flag is set in step S3608 in the AT effect setting process from the second game of the final set to the eighth game of the final set, which is the next game. By determining that the game has been performed, a process for setting a jackpot effect or a transition effect is performed. Then, in the ninth and subsequent games of the final set, since the jackpot effect flag is cleared, a negative determination is made in step S3608, and the fourth specific effect setting process is performed. In the fourth specific effect setting process, it is determined in step S3703 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, and since the adjusted flag is not set in step S3715, the process proceeds to step S3712 to perform the non-fourth specific effect. The process to do is executed.

If the jackpot effect counter 2 is 7 or more in step S3005, the process proceeds to step S3909, and the jackpot effect currently being executed is performed so that the final set of the pseudo set effect is performed from the ninth game of the final set of the AT mode. After finishing once, the game that generates the fourth specific effect in the pseudo set effect after the pseudo set effect (the number of continuous games of the pseudo set effect) and the number of continuous games of the jackpot effect after the pseudo set effect are determined. Execute the process to be performed.

That is, in step S3909, first, the process of clearing the jackpot effect counter 1 and the jackpot effect counter 2 to 0 is executed. Then, in step S3910, a process of setting the transition effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed (FIG. 83 (b4)), and a process of clearing the jackpot effect flag is executed in step S3911. ..

In the following step S3912, the process of acquiring the adjustment game number table from the various table storage areas 182a is executed, and in step S3913, the adjustment game number lottery process is executed.

The adjustment game number table is a table for determining the number of continuous games of the next jackpot effect of the jackpot effect currently being executed, and as shown in FIG. 88, the number of games from 4 to 7 games is set. ing. In step S3913, the number of games from these 4 games to 7 games is randomly determined by lottery or the like.

After executing the process of step S3913, the process of inputting the process result of step S3913 to the adjusted counter 2 provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed in step S3914. The adjusted counter 2 is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games of the jackpot effect next to the jackpot effect currently being executed.

In the following step S3915, the calculation process of the number of games for which the fourth specific effect is generated for adjustment is executed. Such a process is a process of calculating a game (the number of continuous games of the pseudo set effect) that generates the fourth specific effect in the pseudo set effect after the jackpot effect that is currently being executed. Specifically, the process of subtracting the adjusted counter 2 from 7 is executed.

Then, in step S3916, a process of inputting the processing result of the above step S3915 into the adjusted counter 1 provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The adjusted counter 1 is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of continuous games of the next pseudo-set effect of the jackpot effect currently being executed. After executing the process of step S3916, the process of setting the adjusted flag is executed in step S3917, and then the present adjustment process ends.

In the AT effect setting process, if the adjusted flag is set in step S3607 and the adjustment process is executed before the previous game, the process proceeds to step S3618. In step S3618, it is determined whether or not the adjusted counter 1 is greater than 0. As described above, the adjusted counter 1 corresponds to the number of remaining games of the adjusted pseudo-set effect, and when the adjusted counter 1 is larger than 0, the game to be started this time is the above-mentioned adjusted. It means that it is a game that should perform a pseudo set production of. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3609 to execute the fourth specific effect setting process.

In the fourth specific effect setting process, it is determined in step S3703 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, and the process proceeds to step S3715. Then, it is determined in step S3715 whether or not the adjusted flag is set. In this case, since the adjusted flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3716 to execute the process of subtracting 1 from the adjusted counter 1. Then, in step S3717, it is determined whether or not the adjusted counter 1 has become 0, and if it has not become 0, the process proceeds to step S3712 to perform a process for generating a non-fourth specific effect. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3717 that the adjusted counter 1 becomes 0, the process of setting the fourth specific effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step S3718 is performed. After that, the fourth specific effect setting process is terminated. In this case, since the number of continuous games of the next jackpot effect has already been set (adjusted counter 2, step S3914), the process of setting the number of continuous games of the next jackpot effect (step S3711) is not executed.

In the AT effect setting process, when the adjusted flag is set in step S3607 and the adjusted counter 1 is 0 in step S3618, the adjusted pseudo set effect has already been executed as described above. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3619 and the adjusted counter 2 is decremented by 1 in order to perform the adjusted jackpot effect. Then, in step S3620, it is determined whether or not the adjusted counter 2 has become 0, and if it has not become 0, the process proceeds to step S3613, and the jackpot effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. After performing the process of setting, the AT effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3620 that the adjusted counter 2 becomes 0, the process of clearing the adjusted flag is executed in step S3621, and then the process proceeds to step S3616, and 11 is set to the pseudo AT counter. The AT effect setting process ends after performing the input process and the process of setting the transition effect of step S3617 to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64.

In this case, the jackpot effect ends in the first game in the final set of the AT mode and the transition effect occurs, and from the second game, the pseudo set adjusted over the number of games according to the value of the adjusted counter 1. The production is performed. Then, after the fourth specific effect is generated in the adjusted pseudo set effect, the adjusted jackpot effect is performed over the number of games according to the value of the adjusted counter 2. Since the adjusted jackpot production is adjusted so that it ends in the 8th game of the final set, in the 9th to 18th games, a pseudo set production in which the non-fourth specific production repeatedly occurs is performed. Then, the AT mode ends (see FIG. 89 (c)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fourth specific effect occurs in the pseudo set effect, the next pseudo set is not started immediately, but the next pseudo set is started through the jackpot effect. Therefore, even if the fourth specific effect is generated early in the pseudo set and the number of corresponding games is small, the number of games can be supplemented by the game in which the jackpot effect is performed. It is possible to raise the expectation that the pseudo set will be updated more purely.

Since the jackpot production can be performed from 4 games to 14 games, after the 4th specific production occurs during the pseudo set, the jackpot production ends in a short number of games and the next pseudo set starts. In some cases, the next pseudo set may be started after the jackpot effect is performed for a long period of time (with a long number of games), and only the timing of the occurrence of the fourth specific effect during the pseudo set effect. Instead, it is possible to pay attention to the occurrence timing of the transition effect (the end timing of the jackpot effect) in the jackpot effect, and it is possible to enjoy the playability with a feeling of excitement.

Here, the pseudo set production (maximum 10 games) performed in the AT mode and the jackpot production (4 games to 14 games) continuous therewith are the number of games of 18 games or more in the AT set when the number of games of both productions is combined. In some cases, the number of games is less than 18 games. By doing so, even if the number of games in the AT set is not lengthened or shortened on the main control device 101 side, the impression is as if the number of games in the AT set is changing depending on the length of both effects. Can be given. By doing so, it is possible to improve the playability of the AT set with a relatively simple configuration.

In this case, since the pseudo set effect and the jackpot effect are set so that the number of games is smaller than the number of games in the AT set even if both are continued to the maximum, both effects are associated with the AT set as a set. It is possible to give a strong impression that the game is being played, and it is possible to help give the impression that the number of games in the AT set changes depending on both effects.

Further, as in the above configuration, when the fourth specific effect occurs in the pseudo set effect, the process shifts to the jackpot effect, while when the pseudo set effect ends without the fourth specific effect occurring, the AT mode is set. By configuring it to end as it is, the fact that the 4th specific effect does not occur in the pseudo set effect and the end of the AT mode are more closely related, and the occurrence of the 4th specific effect can be made more awaited. It will be possible.

<Other Embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description contents of each embodiment and each modification described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be individually applied to a new configuration composed of a combination of embodiments and modifications, and some or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) The AT mode is set to the set management type AT mode, and the number of continuous games in the AT mode is different according to the continuation rate, but the AT mode is different in the ease of continuation (the number of continuous games). May be provided. In this case, for example, a plurality of AT modes having different initial game numbers may be set, or a plurality of AT modes having different winning probabilities of the end lottery may be set so that the AT mode continues until the end lottery is won. May be set, or a plurality of AT modes having different winning probabilities of the predetermined end result are configured so that the AT mode ends when a predetermined end result (for example, a predetermined bonus result, etc.) is won. May be set, a plurality of AT modes having different winning probabilities for adding the number of games may be set, or a plurality of AT modes having different numbers of additional games at the time of winning the number of games may be set. , These may be combined. Then, the winning probability of the specific production lottery, the winning probability of the suggestion production lottery, the number of ending games, the number of games of the jackpot production, and the like may be different depending on which AT mode is used.

(2) Although the set management type AT mode in which 18 games are set as one set is adopted, the number of games in the one set is not limited to this, and may be more or less than 18 games. Further, the number of games in one set may change (there are more sets than 18 games), for example, the number of games may be added in one set. Further, for example, in a configuration in which the continuation condition is always satisfied in the first set as in the second embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the number of continuous games in the first set is doubled. It may be set as a number (36 games), and when updating not only the first set but also the AT set for which the continuation condition is satisfied, the number of games is doubled as the number of games in the set. Alternatively, the number of games corresponding to the value of the AT set counter (if the AT set counter is 3, the number of games is tripled, etc.) may be set as the number of games in the set.

(3) In AT modes with different continuation rates, the lottery table used in the lottery process of each game is common, but the lottery table may be configured differently in each AT mode, and each AT mode may have a different lottery table. The winning probability of a part or all of a predetermined combination or a specific combination or other results may be different, or the probability of occurrence of a specific effect may be different in each AT mode due to the difference in winning probability. In this case, the winning probabilities of a part or all of a predetermined combination or a specific combination or other results may be different in each AT mode to the extent that the player cannot identify them (a configuration having substantially the same probability).

(4) In the AT addition process, the specific combination can be added and won, while the normal combination is not added and won, but the ordinary combination may also be added and won. In this case, it is preferable that the probability of the additional winning in the normal combination is lower than the probability of the additional winning in the specific combination. In addition, it is excluded that the probability of additional winning in some of the normal roles (for example, normal lip C) is higher than the probability of additional winning in some of the specific roles (for example, chance eye A). As a whole, it suffices if a specific winning combination is easier to win than a normal winning combination.

(5) The winning probability of the specific production lottery is set to be higher for the specific role than for the normal role, but the winning probability of the specific production lottery for the specific role and the normal role is the same or substantially the same. It may be set. Even in this case, since it is easier to win a normal role than a specific role in the lottery process of each game, the specific effect is generated by the normal role rather than the ratio of the specific effect generated by the specific role. The ratio is larger. Further, the probability of winning the specific production lottery may be higher for the normal role than for the specific role. In this case, the specific effect is triggered by the normal role rather than the ratio of the specific effect generated by the specific role. It is advisable to adjust the winning probability in the lottery process of each game of the normal combination and the specific combination and the winning probability of the specific production lottery so that the rate of occurrence of is larger.

(6) As an advantageous judgment that causes an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player, the continuation of the AT set in the AT mode is regarded as an advantageous event, and the continuation lottery is taken as an example of the advantageous judgment, and then the continuation condition of the AT set is satisfied. A specific effect is performed as an effect corresponding to what is desired, but it is sufficient if the effect is associated with an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player. For example, the player has won the lottery for transition to the AT mode. It may be an effect associated with, or it may be an effect associated with winning the execution lottery of the suggestion effect suggesting the set value, or it may be won in the additional lottery of the AT mode. It may be an associated effect.

In this case, if a specific effect is to be performed as an effect associated with winning the AT mode transition lottery, the player wins the AT mode transition lottery and wins the AT mode transition lottery via the precursor mode. In the configuration in which the winning effect of what has been done is performed, the specific effect can be generated during the precursor mode, before the winning effect is performed, or before the AT mode is started, so that the AT mode can be generated. After providing multiple modes with different winning probabilities for the transition lottery, the probability of occurrence of a specific effect may differ depending on each mode, or the lottery result of each game may be used to perform a specific effect execution lottery. It is good to do it.

In addition, if a specific effect is to be performed as an effect associated with winning the suggestion effect execution lottery that suggests the set value, from the time the suggestion effect execution lottery is won until the suggestion effect is performed. In addition to the configuration that requires multiple games, a specific effect can occur in the game from winning the execution lottery of the suggestion effect to the time when the suggestion effect is performed, so that the suggestion effect of the set value can be generated. After providing multiple modes with different winning probabilities for the execution lottery, the probability of occurrence of a specific effect may differ depending on each mode, or the execution lottery for a specific effect may be performed using the lottery results of each game. It is good to do it.

Then, if a specific effect is to be performed as an effect associated with winning the AT mode additional lottery, a configuration that requires a plurality of games from winning the additional lottery to the addition is performed. After that, a specific effect can occur in the game from winning the additional lottery to the addition being performed, and after providing multiple modes with different winning probabilities of the additional lottery, depending on each mode. It is preferable to configure the structure so that the probability of occurrence of the specific effect is different, or to perform the execution lottery of the specific effect by using the lottery result of each game.

In these cases, the trigger for determining the advantage of causing an advantageous event may be set according to each advantageous event, and if the transition to AT mode is regarded as an advantageous event, the AT mode transition lottery is executed. As an opportunity, for example, winning a specific combination or digesting a predetermined number of games may be used as a predetermined determination trigger.

(7) Although the specific effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64, it may be performed by another display unit, a lamp, or the like, or by using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. May be good. When each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is used, for example, in a game in which a specific effect is not performed, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started to rotate as usual, while in a game in which a specific effect is performed, each reel 32L , 32M, 32R are different from the normal rotation start mode (for example, the period until the start of rotation is made longer or shorter than usual, the rotation is started in order from the left reel 32L, and the constant speed rotation is performed. The rotation may be started in a mode such as low-speed rotation or temporary stop in a state where a predetermined symbol combination is formed. It should be noted that the specific effect is not limited to the start of rotation, and in the game, the rotation mode from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the end of rotation is set to a specific mode different from the normal mode. It may be configured to be performed.

(8) When the specific production lottery is won, the specific production is performed in the winning game, but the specific production corresponding to the winning of the specific production lottery in the game after the winning game. It may be configured to perform. In this case, the specific effect may be determined by lottery or the like in which game the specific effect is to be performed, or the specific effect may be performed after a predetermined number of games. However, the game that performs the specific effect needs to be a game that can execute the specific effect (during the confrontation effect or the pseudo set of the set), but in determining the game that executes the specific effect, the playable game It is advisable to configure the game to determine the game to execute the specific effect from.

(9) The configuration is such that a specific effect lottery is performed according to the lottery result of each game. For example, at the start of the confrontation effect or the start of the pseudo set effect, the execution lottery of the specific effect or the number of executed games The lottery may be performed. In this case, the lottery may be performed regardless of the lottery result of the game in which the lottery is performed, or the lottery may be performed according to the lottery result of the game in which the lottery is performed. (The winning probability of the execution lottery and the number of execution games differ depending on the lottery result).

(10) When the specific production lottery during the confrontation production is won, only the game that won the specific production lottery is configured to perform the specific production. However, the specific production may be performed after the winning game. May be configured to be performed over a plurality of games.

(11) In the set management type AT mode, the continuation rate is set when shifting to the AT mode, and the continuation rate does not change during the AT mode, but the continuation rate may change even during the AT mode. It may be configured. For example, a lottery for changing the continuation rate is performed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity such as when each game or set is updated, and when the change lottery is won, the subsequent continuation rate changes (for example, from 10% continuation rate to 60). It may be configured (with a continuation rate of%). When the continuation rate changes, not only the continuation rate becomes high but also the continuation rate becomes low. The lottery with a high continuation rate and the lottery with a low continuation rate are drawn separately. Alternatively, the lottery may be performed at different lottery opportunities.

Furthermore, the pattern that the first set continues at 90%, the second set continues at 10%, the third and subsequent sets continue at 60%, the first set continues at 10%, and the second set continues at 60. Scenario management that determines which pattern to use when shifting to AT mode by providing multiple patterns with predetermined continuation rates for each set, such as a pattern that continues at% and continues at 90% after the third set. It may be a type AT mode.

In these configurations, it is preferable that the continuation rate of this set affects the continuation rate of the set from the next time onward. For example, if the continuation rate of the next set is determined by lottery or the like when the set is updated. , The configuration to determine the next continuation rate by referring to the current continuation rate (for example, if this time is 10%, 90% is more likely to be selected than 10% next time, and if this time is 60%, the next time Is a configuration in which 60% is easier to select than other continuation rates), and with the above scenario management type configuration, it is possible to narrow down the continuation rate of the next set from the continuation rate of this set. By doing so, the significance of predicting and grasping the continuation rate (of this set) based on the specific effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition is guaranteed.

(12) In a configuration in which the continuation rate can change in each set, a specific effect corresponding to the satisfaction of the continuation condition of the current set is replaced with a configuration in which the continuation rate of the current set is generated, or In addition, a specific effect corresponding to the satisfaction of the continuation condition of this set may be generated according to the continuation rate of the set from the next time onward.

(13) Even during the opening effect, the battle effect, the jackpot effect, and the ending effect, various specific effects may occur on condition that the continuation condition of the AT set is satisfied. In this case, for example, it is preferable to have a configuration in which a specific effect is more likely to occur in a confrontation effect than in a battle effect, or a configuration in which a pseudo set effect is more likely to occur than an opening effect, a jackpot effect, or an ending effect. ..

(14) Although the occurrence rate of the specific effect is different according to the continuation rate of the AT mode, the mode of the specific effect (color and shape of the character to be displayed, display timing, etc.) may be different, or the specific effect may be different. In the configuration in which the above can be performed over a plurality of games, the number of executed games of the specific effect may be different depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode.

(15) Depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode, the lottery table used for the lottery process of each game may be different, so that the winning probability of the predetermined result may be different. In this case, by setting the predetermined result as a trigger for the occurrence of the specific effect, it is possible to make the occurrence rate of the specific effect different according to the continuation rate of the AT mode. Further, the expected medal increase number (net increase number) per game may be different depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode, such as by setting the push order bell as a predetermined result. For example, the continuation rate is high. The expected number of medals may increase as the number of medals increases, or the number of expected medals may increase as the continuation rate increases. The configuration in which the expected number of medals is increased according to the continuation rate of the AT mode is not limited to the configuration realized by the configuration in which the lottery table is different. It may be realized in different ways, or a configuration in which the mode of notification of the push order at the time of winning, such as a push order bell, is different (a mode of notifying the two-choice push order, a mode of notifying the one-choice push order, etc.). It may be realized by the configuration in which the winning probabilities of the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination differ depending on the mode of the push order notification), or may be realized by other configurations.

(16) In a configuration in which a specific effect is generated when a specific effect is not won in the set addition lottery in the AT set for which the continuation condition is satisfied, the set addition lottery triggered by a specific role is not won. In this case, the specific effect is not limited to the mode in which the specific effect is generated, and the specific effect may be generated when the special effect is not won in the set addition lottery triggered by the normal combination. A specific effect may be generated in a part of the case where the lottery for adding the set is not won. In these, it is preferable that the specific effect triggered by the specific role is more likely to occur than the specific effect triggered by the normal role.

(17) A specific effect may be performed when a set addition in an AT set for which the continuation condition is satisfied is won. In this case, a specific effect may be performed in a part of the case where the set addition is won, or the probability of performing the specific effect may differ depending on the lottery result that triggered the set addition. More specifically, A lottery result with a low winning probability may be configured to facilitate a specific effect when the set is added, or a lottery result with a low winning probability may be configured to be difficult to perform a specific effect when the set is added.

(18) If the continuation condition is satisfied by winning the additional lottery during the AT set for which the continuation condition is not satisfied, the specific production lottery may not be performed in the game. Further, in the game, the specific effect lottery may not be performed, and the specific effect may be generated after the predetermined game through the specific effect lottery or without the specific effect lottery. It may be configured to generate a specific effect.

(19) In the suggestion effect table, the suggestion effect can be performed when the result is out of order, but the suggestion effect may be generated even in other normal or specific roles.

(20) When a specific effect occurs, the state may be such that the suggestion effect can be performed with a predetermined probability, and the probability of the state where the suggestion effect can be performed differs depending on the set value. Alternatively, the configuration may differ depending on the continuation rate. Further, in a configuration in which a specific effect can occur a plurality of times during a confrontation effect, the probability of occurrence of the suggestion effect and the transition rate of the state in which the suggestion effect can be performed may differ depending on the number of occurrences of the specific effect. The configuration may be such that the probability of occurrence of the suggestion effect increases as the number of occurrences of the specific effect increases, or the transition rate to a state in which the suggestion effect can be performed increases.

(21) In the configuration for performing the pseudo-set effect, if the corresponding specific effect does not occur during the pseudo-set, the pseudo-set effect is terminated and the ending effect is performed until the AT mode ends. However, the effect may not be performed until the game in which the AT mode ends, or the number of remaining games in the pseudo-set effect may be extended until the AT mode ends.

(22) On the premise that the ending effect is performed after the pseudo set effect, for example, the pseudo set effect is updated by generating a specific effect in the first game of the AT set for which the continuation condition is not satisfied. , If the ending effect is not performed, the number of remaining games in the AT set for which the continuation condition is not satisfied is specified in the game in which the number of continuous games (10 games) + 1 (11 games remaining) of the pseudo set effect is set. It is preferable to generate an effect and update the pseudo set effect.

(23) The maximum number of continuous games for the pseudo set effect is set to 10 games, but the number may be less than the number of continuous games (18) in the AT set, and may be 11 games or more, or 9 games or less. There may be. On the contrary, the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set effect may be the number of continuous games (18) or more of the AT set, 18 games, or 19 games or more. The maximum number of continuous games may be different in each pseudo set, and in the configuration where the maximum number of continuous games is different in each pseudo set, the maximum number of continuous games may be determined by lottery or the like when the pseudo set is updated. In this case, when updating the pseudo set in an AT set for which the continuation condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to set the number of remaining games in the AT set to be the maximum number of continuous games in the pseudo set after the update.

In addition, the number of continuous games in the AT set is set to be an integral multiple of the maximum number of continuous games in the pseudo set effect, and the maximum number of continuous games in the pseudo set effect is set to be an integral multiple of the maximum number of continuous games in the AT set. You may set the number of both continuous games. For example, if the number of continuous games of the AT set is 18, the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set production may be 9 games or 6 games, or the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set production may be 36 games or 54 games. good.

(24) In the first game of the AT set for which the continuation condition is not satisfied, the number of remaining games in the AT mode is 18 games, and the specific effect is forcibly performed by the pseudo set effect. , The game in which the specific effect is forcibly performed (without going through the specific effect lottery) is not limited to the first game of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. For example, in a configuration in which the success or failure of the continuation condition of the next AT set is determined at the end of the AT set (final game), if the continuation condition of the next AT set is not satisfied in the final game of the AT set, The game may be configured to generate a specific effect and update the pseudo set. At least, the number of remaining games in the AT mode is a predetermined number that is not more than twice the maximum number of continuous games (20 games) in the pseudo set and is equal to or more than the number obtained by adding 1 to the maximum number of continuous games (11 games). By forcibly generating a specific effect in the game, the next pseudo set of the pseudo set ended by the specific effect can be executed over the maximum number of continuous games. After the next pseudo-set is executed over the maximum number of continuous games, it is possible to configure the configuration so that the next pseudo-set cannot be executed over the maximum number of continuous games. In addition, when the configuration is such that the specific effect is forcibly performed according to the number of remaining games in the AT mode as described above, the game in which the specific effect can be forcibly performed (for example, the final game of the pseudo set as described above). Then, it is possible to camouflage the specific effect well by making it easier for the specific effect to occur than in other games.

(25) In relation to the forced termination condition of the advantageous section, a specific effect may be forcibly generated during the pseudo set effect. For example, when the number of games until reaching the upper limit of 1500 games reaches a predetermined number, the AT mode is an advantageous section by forcibly generating a specific effect during the pseudo set effect. Even when the game ends under the forced end condition, it is possible to match the end game with the end game of the pseudo set effect. The above-mentioned predetermined number is preferably the number of games obtained by adding 1 to the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set effect, and more preferably the number of games is twice or less the maximum number of continuous games. Further, in a configuration in which the ending effect is performed before reaching the maximum number of 1500 games, the number of games up to the number of games (1450 games) excluding the number of games for which the ending effect is performed (for example, 50 games) is described above. It is preferable to have a configuration in which a compulsory specific effect is generated when the number reaches a predetermined number.

(26) After the specific effect is performed during the confrontation effect, the effect suggesting the value of the AT set counter on the main control device 101 side (the number of remaining AT sets) is performed, or before the specific effect is executed. However, the structure may be such that the suggestive effect can be easily performed.

(27) If the continuation condition is satisfied during the battle production, the battle production table is rewritten, but the continuation condition is satisfied when the ally character revives and wins after the ally defeat production. If the continuation condition is met during the battle production, the battle production table that will be the defeat of the ally will be used as it is, and the revival victory will be performed after the defeat of the ally. May be good.

(28) The confrontation production is 10 games and the battle production is 8 games, so that the number of games in which the confrontation production is performed is larger than the number of games in which the battle production is performed in one AT set. The confrontation production may be 9 games, the battle production may be 9 games, the confrontation production may be 8 games or less, and the battle production may be 10 games or more.

(29) The battle effect is performed even if a specific effect occurs during the confrontation effect, but if a specific effect occurs during the confrontation effect, the battle effect is not performed and the jackpot effect (Fig. 64 (b)). May be configured to be played until the end game of the AT set.

(30) Although the confrontation effect and the battle effect are continuously performed, the confrontation effect and the battle effect may be intervened by a game in which a predetermined effect such as the above-mentioned jackpot effect is performed.

(31) The expected number of medals to be increased per game in the AT mode is not limited to the above, and may be larger or smaller than the above. Further, the expected number of medals may be changed in the middle of the AT mode. For example, JAC is provided as a kind of bonus that increases the winning probability of the push order bell or the like over a predetermined number of games, and when the JAC is won. If the JAC prize can be established, the expected number of medals increased per game over a predetermined number of games thereafter, and if the JAC prize cannot be established at the time of winning the JAC, the expected number of medals increased. May be configured to remain unchanged. For example, when the JAC is won, if the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is a predetermined order, the JAC winning is not established, and if the specific order is different from the predetermined order, the JAC winning is established. It is possible to change the expected number of medals to be increased in the middle of the AT mode depending on whether or not the push order notification of the order is executed.

(32) Although the continuation rate of the AT set is suggested by the occurrence rate of the specific effect or the like, the effect suggesting the continuation rate may be separately performed. For example, a plurality of background colors in the auxiliary display unit 65 in the AT mode are provided, and in the AT mode of 10% continuation, for example, blue is easily selected as the background color, while in the AT mode of 90% continuation, the background color is the background color. For example, red color may be easily selected.

(33) In the advantageous section transition lottery process, it is set to win the advantageous section transition lottery regardless of the lottery result, but the winning probability is not limited to the above.

(34) Various effects in AT mode (confrontation effect, normal effect, specific effect, battle effect, pattern variation effect, second specific effect, non-second specific effect, standby effect, opening effect, pseudo set effect, third specific effect It goes without saying that the production modes of production, non-third specific production, ending production, update production, non-update production, revival production, jackpot production, transition production, etc.) are examples, and are not limited to the above.

(35) The push order notification is executed by both the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side and the auxiliary display unit 65 on the display control device 81 side, but it is also possible to execute the push order notification by either one. Often, for example, depending on the lottery result and the state, the display control device 81 may not execute the execution on the main control device 101 side, but may execute the execution on the display control device 81 side.

(36) The instruction monitor 68 has a configuration capable of notifying each of the six operation sequences. For example, as in the normal rips A to C, the stop switch to be operated first among the operation sequences of the stop switches 42 to 44. Regarding the push order combination to which only 42 to 44 are associated, the configuration may include a push order notification mode in which only the stop switches 42 to 44 to be operated first are notified.

(37) Although the advantageous section is terminated at the end of the AT mode, the advantageous section may not be terminated at the end of the AT mode. For example, the advantageous section may not end according to the number of remaining games in the advantageous section at the end of the AT mode. Specifically, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section at the end of the AT mode is set to the number of remaining games. If the number of sheets multiplied by the expected increase number per mode game is less than or equal to the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets) of the advantageous section or less than the upper limit increase number, the advantageous section may not be terminated. If the number of sheets obtained by multiplying the current advantageous section increase / decrease number MY by the above is less than or equal to the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets) of the advantageous section or less than the upper limit increase number, the advantageous section should not be terminated. It may be.

(38) The eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is controlled to be lit at the time of transition to the advantageous section, but the eighth display segment N8 is not controlled to be lit even at the time of transition to the advantageous section, which is advantageous. The lighting may be controlled when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied during the section. The predetermined lighting condition may be satisfied when the push order notification can occur, for example, when the transition to the AT mode is confirmed.

(39) The push order notification may be executed at least once during the CZ mode. Further, even in the AT mode, the push order notification may be executed at least once, and even if the number of remaining games in the AT mode and the CZ mode becomes 0, the push order notification is executed once. , The AT mode or the CZ mode may not be terminated.

(40) The first BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 3-bet game, and the second BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 2-bet game. However, only one of the BBs may be used, for example, 2 The second BB may be won in the bet game, and none of the BBs may be won in the 3-bet game.

(41) In the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB is won, but in the 2-bet game, a plurality of types of BBs may be won. For example, in the 2-bet game, the 1st BB and the 2nd BB may be won. It may be a structure that can be won. In this case, the 1st BB prize and the 2nd BB prize can be established in the 2-bet game, and neither the 1st BB nor the 2nd BB is won in the 3-bet game, and the 1st BB prize and the 1st BB prize are obtained in the 3-bet game. The configuration may be such that neither of the 2BB prizes is established. The relationship between the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game may be the opposite of that described above.

(42) Although the same lottery table is used in both the first BB state and the second BB state to have the same game base, different lottery tables may be used to obtain different net increases in the number of sheets.

(43) The first BB state and the second BB state are both configured to be played in a 3-bet game. For example, the first BB state is played in a 3-bet game and the second BB state is a 2-bet game. The number of bets may differ depending on the type of BB state, such as playing a game. In this case, each game in the first BB state is a game with a bet number different from the specific specified number, and each game in the second BB state is a game with a bet number different from the specified specified number.

(44) The games in the first BB state and the second BB state are both configured so that the execution related to the instruction function such as the push order notification process and the specific process is restricted. For example, the game in the first BB state is The execution of the processing related to these instruction functions is restricted, while the game in the second BB state is allowed to execute the processing related to these instruction functions. good. Further, a CB state, an SB state, and an MB state may be provided, and any or all of these may be configured to limit or not limit the processing related to each instruction function.

(45) In the 3-bet game, the 2nd BB prize cannot be established, and in the 2-bet game, the 1st BB prize cannot be established. The configuration may be such that the first BB winning is less likely to be won in the 2-bet game than in the 3-bet game.

(46) In the 3-bet game, the 2nd BB is not won, and in the 2-bet game, the 1st BB is not won. In the game, it may be more difficult to win the first BB than in the 3-bet game.

(47) An operation unit in which one bet can be set may be provided. In this case, the number of bets may be different depending on the number of times the operation unit is operated. Specifically, if the operation unit is operated once, it may be 1 bet, if it is operated twice, it may be 2 bets, and if it is operated 3 times, it may be 3 bets. Furthermore, even if the desired number of bets is exceeded, such as 1 bet when the operation is performed 4 times and 2 bets when the operation is performed 5 times, the desired number of bets is set by re-operation. It is preferable to have a possible configuration.

(48) The maximum number of games in the CZ mode is uniformly set to 10 games, but the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like. Further, although the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode is uniformly set to 40 games, the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like.

(49) The net increase in the number of medals per game in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state is set to about plus 0.00, and the medals do not increase or decrease in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state. The configuration may be such that the number of medals can be increased, or the configuration may be such that the number of medals can be decreased. In this case, the net increase number in the first BB state and the second BB state may be at least as long as the net increase number is larger than the net increase number when the internal state or the non-internal state is played in the 3-bet game.

(50) The player is allowed to execute each process related to the instruction function by playing the internal state or the non-internal state in the 2-bet game instead of the 3-bet game, or by establishing the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize. The configuration is such that the game shifts from the state in which the game is played to the state in which the game is restricted. May be.

(51) The ball ejection rate is changed according to each set value. Setting 1 has the lowest ball ejection rate and setting 6 has the highest ball ejection rate. However, depending on the set value, the ball ejection rate (game medium) Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase / decrease and the mode of increase / decrease of are changed. For example, the payout rates of some of the set values may be the same, such as the payout rates of the setting 1 and the setting 2 being the same, but the payout rates of the other set values may be different. Further, settings 1, 3 and 5 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is high, and settings 2, 4 and 6 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is low. In addition, in settings 1 and 5, the amount of balls ejected increases by a predetermined amount in a short time and decreases by a predetermined amount in a long time, and in settings 2, 3 and 4, it takes longer than the settings 1 and 5 to increase the predetermined amount. The reduction of a predetermined amount may take less time than the settings 1 and 5, and the setting 6 may be configured such that the increase or decrease of the number of balls is hardly generated. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(52) A slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, five reels and five corresponding stop switches are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Further, the slot machine in which the effective line is set to 1 line in the situation where the number of bets is 3 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the effective line may be 5 lines.

(53) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine (so-called ball-using rotating cylinder type game machine) having a ball insertion and ball payout function such as a pachinko machine may be used. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

(54) In the above embodiment, a gaming machine of a type in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game is exemplified by inserting a medal as a game medium and setting the number of bets to start the game. However, this does not deny a medalless type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, it is possible to set the number of bets on the game using a virtual gaming medium (predetermined gaming value) and start the game, and as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game, the above A virtual game medium (predetermined game value) corresponding to a predetermined number of medals may be provided. In this case, the number of virtual gaming media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or the information corresponding to the number of virtual gaming media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the above-mentioned pachinko machine may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, it is preferable to have a configuration for notifying information indicating the number of prize balls.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A game progress means (execution of normal processing by the main control device 101) for advancing the game with the game starting based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ending based on the predetermined end condition being satisfied as one game. Function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in a game advanced by the game progress means, and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that grants a privilege to a player according to a lottery result by the lottery means and a result of a game advanced by the game progressing means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Based on a predetermined determination opportunity, an advantage determination means (continuation determination process or AT addition process by the main control device 101) for executing an advantage determination for causing an advantageous event (AT mode set continuation) that is advantageous for the player is performed. Function to execute) and
When the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous result corresponding to causing the advantageous event, the advantageous execution means (AT by the main control device 101) that causes the advantageous event at a predetermined specific timing. A process for starting a new set in the mode process, for example, a function for executing the process of steps S1404 to S1406) and
When the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is the advantage result and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result in the specific game executed in the situation before the specific timing. An execution determination means (a function of executing a specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) for determining execution of executing the specific notification corresponding to the advantageous result, and
When the determination result by the execution determination means is the corresponding result corresponding to the execution of the specific notification, the specific notification means for executing the specific notification (the function of executing the specific effect setting process by the display control device 81) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the start operation by the player, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and the privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, an advantageous determination is made to generate an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player, and when the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result, an advantageous event occurs at a predetermined specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game by adding the game property that causes an advantageous event in the game property such as obtaining a privilege in each game.

In such playability, depending on the advantage of the advantageous event, the player's interest is concentrated on the advantageous judgment that causes the advantageous event rather than the lottery result of each game and the privilege grant based on the lottery result. In some cases, the slot machine, in which the player's operation is involved in the start of the game and the granting of benefits, may be neglected. In particular, when the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result, the game until the advantageous event occurs becomes a game waiting for the advantageous event, and there is a high possibility that the interest of the player is lowered.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in a game as a specific game in a situation after the result of the advantageous determination that causes an advantageous event becomes an advantageous result but before the advantageous event occurs, the lottery result of the game is determined. Since the execution judgment of the specific notification corresponding to the advantageous result is performed, the psychology of the player who wants to know that the advantageous result has been obtained before the advantageous event occurs is used to determine the specific game. The degree of attention to the lottery result is preferably increased.

Moreover, by adopting the above configuration, a lottery for each game is performed in a game in which there is a time lag between the result of the advantageous determination executed based on the predetermined determination trigger and the occurrence of the advantageous event. Since the specific notification corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event is performed according to the result, the specific notification is not performed as the result of the advantageous judgment based on the predetermined judgment result, but as if it depends on the lottery result of each game. It is also possible to give the impression that the advantageous determination is made and, as a result, the specific notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the specific game until an advantageous event occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A2. A first state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second state (for example, an AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) are set in which the probability that the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means becomes the advantage result is different. And
The probability that the determination result of the execution determination will be the corresponding result in the specific game when the advantageous result is obtained in the first state, and the specific game when the advantageous result is obtained in the second state. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the determination result of the execution determination is different from the probability of the corresponding result.

According to the above configuration, in the first state and the second state in which the probability that the result of the advantageous determination becomes the advantageous result is different, the probability that the specific notification is executed and won in the specific game even if the lottery result is obtained by the same lottery means. Is different. By doing so, not only the game property of grasping the result of the advantageous judgment by the specific notification but also the game property of grasping the judgment state (first state or the second state) of the advantageous judgment by the specific notification is added and specified. By increasing the degree of attention to the notification, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the lottery result in the specific game.

Feature A3. The second state has a higher probability that the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means will be the advantage result than the first state.
The identification when the advantageous result is obtained in the second state rather than the probability that the determination result of the execution determination is the corresponding result in the specific game when the advantageous result is obtained in the first state. The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the probability that the determination result of the execution determination will be the corresponding result is higher in the game.

According to the above configuration, the more the determination state (second state) in which an advantageous result is likely to be obtained, the easier it is for the specific notification to be executed in the specific game. That is, in the determination state in which the advantageous result is likely to occur, the specific notification is likely to be executed after the advantageous result is obtained and before the advantageous event occurs. In other words, in a determination state in which an advantageous result is unlikely to occur, many games in which specific notification is not performed between the time when an advantageous result is obtained and the time when an advantageous event occurs can be digested. By doing so, in a configuration in which the attention level of each game is improved by utilizing the player's psychology that expects the specific notification to be executed, the game that can be expected to have the effect of improving the attention level has an advantageous event. The less likely it is, the more it will increase. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention of each game while avoiding an increase in the ball output rate due to an excessively high occurrence rate of advantageous events.

Further, for example, in a configuration in which an advantageous determination is performed by taking over the determination state of the previous advantage determination even after an advantageous event occurs, or in a configuration in which the previous determination state affects the subsequent determination state. Is considered to be of great interest to the player to grasp the judgment state of the advantage judgment by the specific notification even after the advantageous result is obtained, and the judgment of the advantage judgment is made from the timing when the specific notification occurs. A game that predicts the state will be added, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Feature A4. The result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means executed in the first state is the advantageous result, and after the advantageous event occurs by the advantageous execution means, the advantageous determination means is more advantageous in the first state. The determination is made, or the advantage determination is more likely to be performed by the advantage determination means in the first state than in the second state, and the advantage determination by the advantage determination means executed in the second state. Is the advantageous result, and after the advantageous event occurs by the advantageous execution means, the advantageous determination is made by the advantageous determination means in the second state, or the second state is more than the first state. The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein the advantage determination means is easily performed by the advantage determination means.

According to the above configuration, after an advantageous result occurs in the advantageous judgment and an advantageous event occurs, the advantageous judgment is performed by taking over the judgment state of the previous advantageous judgment, or the advantageous judgment is performed by taking over the judgment state of the previous advantageous judgment. A game that predicts the judgment state of the advantage judgment is added from the timing when the specific notification is generated, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature A5. As the specific result, a first specific result (normal combination) and a second specific result (specific combination) different from the first specific result are set.
The lottery means performs the lottery so as to obtain the first specific result with the first probability, and the lottery so as to obtain the second specific result with a second probability which is a probability lower than the first probability. To do
The execution determination means makes the execution determination so as to obtain the corresponding result with the third probability in the case of the first specific result, and is higher than the third probability in the case of the second specific result. The execution determination is performed so that the corresponding result is obtained with the fourth probability, which is the probability.
The product of the first probability and the third probability (5.5% if the continuation rate is 10%, 13.3% if the continuation rate is 90%) is the product of the second probability and the fourth probability (the product of the second probability and the fourth probability). The game according to any one of features A1 to A4, which is set to be 0.8% when the continuation rate is 10%, 1.0% when the continuation rate is 90%, and larger than FIG. 51). Machine.

According to the above configuration, there is a first specific result and a second specific result that is harder to win than that, and the identification is triggered by the second specific result rather than the execution judgment of the specific notification triggered by the first specific result. In a configuration in which the notification execution judgment is easier to win, the product of the winning probability of the first specific result (first probability) and the winning probability of the specific notification execution judgment triggered by the first specific result (third probability). Is set to be larger than the product of the winning probability of the second specific result (second probability) and the winning probability of the execution judgment of the specific notification triggered by the second specific result (fourth probability). Therefore, the specific notification triggered by the first specific result is substantially more likely to occur than the specific notification triggered by the second specific result. By doing so, although it is easy to execute the specific notification triggered by the second specific result as a so-called rare role, it is difficult to win the second specific result, and in fact, the specific notification is executed. It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as not being so much. Therefore, even if it is the first specific result that is relatively easy to win as the lottery result of the game, it can be expected that the specific notification will be performed, and the configuration is such that the effect of improving the degree of attention using the specific notification is preferably achieved. Is possible.

Feature A6. The execution determination means is configured to determine execution of executing the specific notification in at least the special number (10) of the specific games.
The first probability is a probability of 1 in the first specific number (1.04), and is
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the first specific number is set to be smaller than the special number.

According to the above configuration, each probability is set so that the specific game that gives the first specific result occurs at least once during the special number of games in which the specific notification can be executed (execution determination is performed). Therefore, it is possible to suitably secure an opportunity for the specific notification to be executed.

Feature A7. The execution determination means is configured to determine execution of executing the specific notification in at least the special number (10) of the specific games.
The second probability is a probability of 1 in the second specific number (28.4), and is
The gaming machine according to feature A5 or feature A6, wherein the second specific number is set to be larger than the special number.

According to the above configuration, each probability increases so that there is a high possibility that the specific game that gives the second specific result does not occur even once during the special number of games in which the specific notification can be executed (execution determination is performed). Since it is set, the significance of setting it so that the specific notification triggered by the first specific result can be easily executed is enhanced.

Feature A8. The execution determination means is configured to determine execution of executing the specific notification in at least the special number (10) of the specific games.
The first probability is a probability of 1 in the first specific number (1.04), and is
The product of the first probability and the third probability is 1 / 3rd specific number (about 1/18.2 if the continuation rate is 10%, 1 / 7.52 if the continuation rate is 90%). The product of the second probability and the fourth probability is 1/14 of the fourth specific number (about 1/122 if the continuation rate is 10%, about 1/105 if the continuation rate is 90%).
Any of the features A5 to A7, wherein the third specific number can be a value smaller than the special number, while the fourth specific number is set so as not to be a value smaller than the special number. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, during a special number of games in which the specific notification can be executed (execution determination is performed), the specific notification triggered by the first specific result can be generated at least once, while the second specific result can be generated. Since the specific notification that triggers the game is set so that it is highly likely that it will not occur even once, it is possible to prevent the event that the special notification that has been prepared is not executed, and the game is relatively won as a result of the lottery. It is possible to raise expectations for the first specific result, which is easy to do.

Feature A9. After the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means, a limiting means (a function of executing a process of setting a generated flag by the display control device 81) for limiting the execution of the specific notification until at least the advantageous event occurs is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, which is characterized by being provided.

According to the above configuration, after the specific notification is executed, the execution of the specific notification again is restricted until an advantageous event occurs. It is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the production.

Feature A10. As the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, the specific effect in the VS display) and the second specific notification (for example, the identification in the ally character up) in which the notification mode is different to the extent that the player can distinguish between the first specific notification and the player. (Direction) and is set,
When the specific notification means is executed in the first specific game (first game of the set) of the specific game, the specific notification means executes the first specific notification, and the first specific notification of the specific game. The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that when the specific notification is executed in a second specific game (sets 2 to 4 games) different from the specific game, the second specific notification is executed. ..

According to the above configuration, once the specific notification is executed, the execution of the specific notification after that is restricted, and the notification mode of the specific notification that can be executed in each game is set to be different. Therefore, if you do not try to confirm the occurrence of the specific notification more carefully, there is a high possibility that you will miss the execution of the specific notification. By doing so, it is possible to further improve the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game production through the expectation for the specific notification.

Feature A11. It is advantageous that the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is different from the advantageous result, and the advantageous event is generated based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game before the specific timing. It is equipped with a second advantageous determination means (a function of executing AT addition processing by the main control device 101) for executing determination.
The advantageous execution means has a configuration in which the advantageous event is generated at the specific timing when the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event.
In the execution determination means, even in a specific game in which the result of the advantage determination by the second advantage determination means is the advantage result and is executed in a situation before the specific timing, the lottery result by the lottery means is obtained in advance. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein when the specified result is determined, the execution determination of executing the specific notification is performed.

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means does not become an advantageous result, if the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means becomes an advantageous result before the specific timing is reached, the specific timing An advantageous event will occur at. Then, even when the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is an advantageous result, the specific notification can be executed when the specific result is in the specific game before the specific timing. In this case, since the advantage determination by the second advantage determination means is performed based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means becomes an advantage result according to the lottery result of each game. In the configuration of notifying as the specific notification, the specific notification that an advantageous event actually occurs according to the lottery result of each game is also performed. By doing so, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that the specific notification is executed as if the advantageous result is obtained according to the lottery result of each game in the situation where the advantageous result is obtained in advance by the advantageous determination means. It becomes.

In addition, in order to clarify the relationship with the "second advantageous determination means" in the above configuration, the "advantageous determination means" in the feature A1 may be expressed as the "first advantageous determination means".

Feature A12. As the specific result, a first specific result (normal combination) and a second specific result (specific combination) different from the first specific result are set.
The lottery means performs the lottery so as to obtain the first specific result with the first probability, and the lottery so as to obtain the second specific result with a second probability which is a probability lower than the first probability. To do
The second advantageous determination means determines an advantage when the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the second specific result, but does not perform the advantageous determination when the first specific result is the result. Or, the advantage determination is performed so that the case where the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the second specific result is more likely to be the advantageous result than the case where the lottery result is the first specific result.
In the specific notification means, the ratio of executing the specific notification when the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the first specific result is the second specific result. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the specific notification is set to be larger than the ratio of executing the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, in the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means, the specific notification is based on the premise that the advantageous result is more likely to be obtained when the second specific result is more difficult to win than the first specific result. 1 The specific notification triggered by the specific result is more likely to occur than the specific notification triggered by the second specific result. With such a configuration, the advantage determination by the second advantage determination means can be performed. It is possible to give a strong impression that an advantageous event may occur as if the first specific result is a trigger, while not making the event that gives an advantageous result too easy to occur. Therefore, while avoiding a soaring ball output rate, in a specific game, even the first specific result, which is easy to win as a lottery result, can be attracted attention, and the specific game until an advantageous event occurs. It will be possible to improve the interest of.

Feature A13. As the specific result, a first specific result (normal combination) and a second specific result (specific combination) different from the first specific result are set.
The lottery means performs the lottery so as to obtain the first specific result with the first probability, and the lottery so as to obtain the second specific result with a second probability which is a probability lower than the first probability. To do
When the result of the advantage determination by the second advantage determination means becomes the advantage result in the wake of the second specific result, the execution determination means and the corresponding result in the specific game that becomes the first specific result. Means that can make the execution determination (in the display control device 81, in a game in which a specific combination is won and a continuation command is received, if the specific effect lottery is not won, the specific effect is produced in the game. Is provided with a function to execute a specific effect setting process that is set so that a specific effect can be performed based on winning a specific effect lottery in a game that is a normal role after that. The gaming machine according to the feature A11 or the feature A12, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means triggered by the second specific result, which is relatively difficult to win, is an advantageous result, the specific result of the second specific result is specified. The specific notification may be executed not in the game but in the specific game that is the first specific result, and the probability that the result of the advantageous judgment triggered by the first specific result will be the advantageous result does not become too high. However, even if it is the first specific result, it is possible to increase the expectation that the result of the advantageous determination will be an advantageous result in a pseudo manner.

Feature A14. As the specific result, a first specific result (normal combination) and a second specific result (specific combination) different from the first specific result are set.
The lottery means performs the lottery so as to obtain the first specific result with the first probability, and the lottery so as to obtain the second specific result with a second probability which is a probability lower than the first probability. To do
When the result of the advantage determination by the second advantage determination means becomes the advantage result in the wake of the second specific result, the execution determination means has the corresponding result in the specific game that has become the second specific result. Means that can make the execution determination (in the display control device 81, in a game in which a specific combination is added and a continuation command is received, if a specific effect lottery is won, the game is specified. The gaming machine according to any one of features A11 to A13, which comprises a function of executing a specific effect setting process set so as to be able to perform an effect).

According to the above configuration, when the result of the advantage determination by the second advantage determination means triggered by the second specific result, which is relatively difficult to win, becomes an advantageous result, it is specified by the specific game that resulted in the second specific result. Notification may be executed. In this way, by notifying by the specific notification that an advantageous event will occur when the second specific result as a so-called rare role is won in the specific game, the advantage determination by the second advantage determination means is performed in the specific game. Can give a strong impression that is actually executed, and as a result, the advantage determination by the second advantage determination means executed in the specific game is not the result of the advantage determination performed based on the predetermined determination opportunity. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of making it appear that a favorable event is occurring.

Feature A15. The result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result, and the advantageous determination of causing the advantageous event based on the lottery result by the lottery means is executed in the specific game before the specific timing. It is equipped with a third advantageous determination means (a function of executing AT addition processing by the main control device 101).
When the result of the advantageous determination by the third advantageous determination means is an advantageous result corresponding to causing the advantageous event, the advantageous execution means is after the advantageous event based on the determination result by the advantageous determination means occurs. , The configuration is such that the advantageous event can occur based on the determination result by the third advantageous determination means.
The execution determination means can perform the execution determination so that the result of the advantage determination by the third advantage determination means is different from the advantage result in the specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, which comprises a function of executing a process of performing a specific effect based on a non-winning command by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous result, if the result of the advantageous determination by the third advantageous determination means becomes an advantageous result before the specific timing is reached, the specific timing is set. Therefore, a so-called advantageous event may be added, such that an advantageous event occurs based on the determination result of the advantageous determination means, and then an advantageous event occurs based on the determination result of the third advantageous determination means. become. Then, in the above configuration, when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous result, the specific notification is executed when the result of the advantageous determination by the third advantageous determination means is not an advantageous result. , It is possible to further strengthen the impression that the specific notification is executed as if the result of the lottery of the specific game is obtained without increasing the winning probability of the advantage judgment by the third advantageous judgment means too much in the specific game. Become.

In addition, in order to clarify the relationship with the "third advantageous determination means" in the above configuration, the "advantageous determination means" in the feature A1 may be expressed as the "first advantageous determination means".

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein the advantage determination means performs the advantage determination regardless of the lottery result by the lottery means in the game in which the predetermined determination opportunity occurs.

According to the above configuration, in order to give an impression that an advantageous event occurs as a result of a specific game after that, an advantageous event is generated based on the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means. It is possible to give an impression that an advantageous event is strongly associated with the lottery result by the lottery means in the subsequent specific game instead of the game in which the specific game is performed, and it is easy to give an impression that the advantageous event occurs as a result of the specific game. can do.

Feature A17. As the specific game, the first specific game in which the specific notification can be executed (for example, a game in which a confrontation effect is performed) and the specific notification are not executed or the specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first specific game. 2 Specific games (for example, games in which battle effects are performed) are set.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, wherein the second specific game is executed after the first specific game, and then the specific timing occurs.

According to the above configuration, after the advantage determination is made, the second specific game in which the specific notification is not performed or is difficult to be performed is executed after the first specific game in which the specific notification can be performed, and then the advantageous event occurs. It will be possible. By doing so, the timing at which the specific notification is performed is limited, and the degree of attention to the specific notification can be improved by increasing the rarity of the specific notification. Moreover, since the configuration is such that the second specific game in which the specific notification cannot be generated intervenes between the first specific game in which the specific notification can occur and the advantageous event, for example, the specific notification is performed in the second specific game. Is configured to notify the presence or absence of the occurrence of an advantageous event in another effect, and it is also possible to preferably eliminate the dispersal of attention due to the mixture of the notification and the specific notification.

Feature A18. In the second specific game, after executing a predetermined notification (for example, an ally attack effect or an enemy attack effect), an advantageous content (a ally victory effect) corresponding to the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means being the advantage result. ) And the corresponding notification means (battle effect by the display control device 81) that can execute the corresponding notification that executes any of the content notifications including the non-advantageous content (enemy victory effect) corresponding to the result different from the advantageous result. The gaming machine according to feature A17, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a process for performing the above.

According to the above configuration, after the execution of the predetermined notification, the corresponding notification in which either the advantageous content or the content notification including the non-advantageous content is performed is performed in the second specific game, and the result of the advantage determination is notified. Since the specific notification is not performed in the second specific game, the attention is distracted by the occurrence of the specific notification in order to enjoy the advantageous result production, and the corresponding notification is fully enjoyed. It is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of not being able to do so, and if the specific notification is performed in the first specific game, only the player who is aware of the occurrence of the specific notification is the second specific game. It is possible to entertain the response notification while immersing it in a sense of superiority, such as knowing that the response notification in the above is advantageous content, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

The invention described in the above features A1 to A18 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. When the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features A1 to A18, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10, and a part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A game progress means (execution of normal processing by the main control device 101) for advancing the game with the game starting based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ending based on the predetermined end condition being satisfied as one game. Function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in a game advanced by the game progress means, and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that grants a privilege to a player according to a lottery result by the lottery means and a result of a game advanced by the game progressing means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
The advantageous state is configured so that a specific number (18 games) or more of games can be executed as a unit state (AT set), and if the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, after the execution of the unit state, after the execution of the unit state, While shifting to the next unit state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the execution of the unit state.
Execution determination to execute the specific notification corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition in the game in which the continuation condition is satisfied and before the game in which the unit state ends. Execution determination means (a function of executing a specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) and
When the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is the corresponding result corresponding to the execution of the specific notification, the specific notification means for executing the specific notification (the process for performing the specific effect by the display control device 81 is executed). Function to do) and
With
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the continuation condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first advantageous state are set. Has been
In a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, the second advantageous state is set so that the specific notification by the specific notification means is more easily executed than the first advantageous state. A game machine to play.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the start operation by the player, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and the privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player is a so-called set management type state in which a specific number or more of games are set as a unit state and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. Has been done.

Then, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, a specific notification as an advance notification corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition may be performed before the unit state ends. Therefore, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the game by arousing the expectation for the specific notification by utilizing the psychology of the player who wants to confirm that the continuation condition is satisfied and feel relieved.

Moreover, the advantageous state is set to a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the continuation condition is more likely to be established, and the specific notification as the above-mentioned advance notice is the second advantageous state than the first advantageous state. It is set so that an advantageous state is more likely to occur. Therefore, the occurrence of the specific notification does not simply indicate the establishment of the continuation condition in the unit state, but indicates the continuation rate of the unit state depending on the generation timing or the like. In other words, when a specific notification occurs, it leads to suggesting that not only the unit state continues but also the continuation rate of the unit state is high, and it is possible to further increase the expectation for the specific notification. Become.

Not only that, as in the above configuration, the higher the continuation rate, the easier it is for the specific notification to occur, so that the number of games from the start of the unit state to the occurrence of the specific notification has an advantage that the continuation rate is high. The lower the condition, the lower the number, and the lower the continuation rate, the higher the number.

Here, assuming that the player is looking forward to the occurrence of the specific notification, the number of games in which the specific notification is expected to occur in one unit state, that is, the specific notification is generated. It is considered that the greater the number of games played, the more the excitement of the unit state can be fully enjoyed. In that respect, as described above, the lower the continuation rate, the larger the number of games until the specific notification is generated, so it is exciting whether or not the specific notification is generated even in an advantageous state where the continuation rate is low. It will be a configuration that can fully entertain the feeling. On the contrary, the higher the continuation rate, the smaller the number of games until the specific notification occurs in one unit state, but the more times the unit state is repeated, the more the specific notification in one unit state. It is possible to make up for the small number of games until the occurrence of. As a result of the above, at each continuation rate, it is possible to fully enjoy the game in which the specific notification is expected to occur.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the execution determination means determines execution of executing the specific notification according to a lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, since the execution determination of executing the specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of each game, not only the expectation that the specific notification is performed but also the lottery result of each game is determined. Can also be noticed. In particular, by providing specific notification according to the lottery result of each game, it is possible to give the impression that the success or failure of the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of each game. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention.

Feature B3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the probability that the determination result of the execution determination by the execution determination means becomes the corresponding result is higher than the first advantageous state in the second advantageous state. It is set to be higher,
The game according to feature B2, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result is set to the same probability or substantially the same probability in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. Machine.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game is a specific result having the same winning probability regardless of the type of the advantageous state, the probability that the judgment result of the execution judgment becomes the execution result is the second advantage over the first advantageous state. Since the state is set to be higher, as a result, the occurrence rate of the specific notification is higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. By doing so, even if the winning probability of the lottery result of each game is not different depending on each advantageous state, the excellent effect of the feature B1 can be expected only by changing the winning probability of the execution lottery of the specific notification. Is possible.

Feature B4. An update means for updating the unit state (a function of executing AT mode processing by the main control device 101) and
When the unit state is updated by the update means, the establishment determination means (function for executing the continuation determination process by the main control device 101) for determining the establishment of the continuation condition is satisfied.
With
The probability that the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means will be the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition is set so as to be higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. And
A first control device (main control device 101) including at least the update means and the establishment determination means, and a control device different from the first control device, the second control device including the execution determination means and the specific notification means. Control device (display control device 81) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, which is characterized by having.

According to the above configuration, the success or failure of the continuation condition is determined at the time of updating the unit state, and the high or low of the continuation rate depends on the probability of determining that the continuation condition is satisfied in the establishment determination. .. Then, the unit state is updated and the continuation condition is determined by the first control device, and the execution determination of the specific notification and the execution of the specific notification are performed by the second control device. It is possible to prevent a local increase in the processing load.

The "update means" is limited to "update means for updating the unit state so as to shift to the next unit state when the unit state ends in a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied". May be good.

Further, regarding the "establishment determination means", "when the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied is terminated by the update means, or when the unit state is updated by the update means and a new unit state is started". In addition, it may be limited to "establishment determination means for determining the establishment that the continuation condition is satisfied".

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the establishment determination means has a configuration in which the establishment determination is performed regardless of the lottery result by the lottery means in the game for which the establishment determination is performed.

According to the above configuration, the success / failure determination of the continuation condition is performed at the continuation rate set according to the type of the advantageous state regardless of the lottery result of the game. By doing so, the processing configuration for success or failure of the continuation condition can be made extremely simple, and the unit state continues to the extent that the design value is exceeded by the lottery result of the game. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such an event.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The establishment determination means makes the establishment determination with the first probability in the first advantageous state, and the establishment determination in the second advantageous state, regardless of the lottery result by the lottery means in the game for which the establishment determination is performed. The gaming machine according to feature B4, characterized in that the establishment determination is made with two probabilities. "

Feature B6. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, the second establishment determination means (main control device 101) that executes the second establishment determination of establishing the continuation condition in the unit state based on the lottery result by the lottery means. Has a function to execute AT addition processing by
The second establishment determination means is described in feature B4 or feature B5, which has a configuration in which the second establishment determination is performed with a common probability in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the judgment result of the continuation judgment performed at the time of updating the unit state is that the continuation condition is not satisfied, the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of the game in the updated unit state. Since the second establishment determination for establishing the above is performed, the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game can be suitably increased. Moreover, since the second establishment determination is made according to the lottery result of each game without depending on the high or low of the continuation rate of the advantageous state, for example, it is said that the advantageous state has a low continuation rate. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in interest in the game without giving up.

In addition, the description that "the second establishment determination is performed with a common probability in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state" is "when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result". In the case of the first advantageous state, the second establishment determination is performed so that the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition with the first probability, and in the case of the second advantageous state, the said The second establishment determination is performed so that the establishment result is obtained with the first probability, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result different from the first result, if it is the first advantageous state. The second establishment determination is performed so that the establishment result is obtained with a second probability different from the first probability, and if the second advantageous state is obtained, the establishment result and the establishment result are obtained with the second probability. The second establishment determination may be made so as to perform the second establishment determination according to the lottery result of each game without depending on the type of the advantageous state. It does not exclude that the probability of establishing the continuation condition differs depending on the lottery result.

Feature B7. When the execution determination means determines the execution of executing the specific notification according to the lottery result by the lottery means, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first specific result (disappearance result). The probability that the determination result of the execution determination by the execution determination means becomes the corresponding result is set to be higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state, while the lottery means. When the lottery result is a second specific result (watermelon) different from the first specific result, the probability that the determination result of the execution determination by the execution determination means becomes the corresponding result is higher than the second advantageous state. The first advantageous state is set to be higher,
Any of the features B1 to B6, wherein the lottery means is set so that the probability that the result of the lottery will be the first specific result is higher than the probability that the result of the lottery will be the second specific result. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, since the execution determination of executing the specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of each game, not only the expectation that the specific notification is performed but also the lottery result of each game is determined. Can also be noticed. In particular, by providing specific notification according to the lottery result of each game, it is possible to give the impression that the success or failure of the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of each game. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention.

Moreover, if the lottery result of the game is the first specific result, the first advantageous state is easier to execute the specific notification than the second advantageous state, and if it is the second specific result, the second advantageous state is more than the first advantageous state. Is set so that the specific notification is more easily executed, and the first specific result is more likely to appear as the lottery result of the game than the second specific result. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the specific notification is more easily executed in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, even though the occurrence rate of the specific notification differs depending on the lottery result of each game. .. By doing so, the game property of predicting the high or low of the continuation rate from the occurrence rate of the specific notification and the game property of providing a feeling of excitement until the specific notification occurs are different depending on the high or low of the continuation rate. In the above, the relationship between the lottery result of the game and the occurrence rate of the specific notification can be varied, and the playability can be suitably improved.

Feature B8. A plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the privilege given by the privilege giving means are set, and a setting value of one of the plurality of setting values is set. Means (a function to execute the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101) and
Special notification means (for example, a function of executing suggestion effect setting processing and ending game number lottery processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing special notification corresponding to the set value set by the setting means.
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the execution probability or execution mode of the special notification by the special notification means is different between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. ..

According to the above configuration, since the execution probability and the execution mode of the special notification as the suggestion effect of the set value are different depending on the continuation rate of the advantageous state, the continuation rate is simply high so that one advantageous state can be continued for a long time. It is possible to add not only the game playability that is expected to be, but also the game playability that the advantageous state is expected to be a continuation rate that makes it easy to discriminate and predict the set value by special notification, which is suitable for the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to improve.

In this case, the high and low of the continuation rate can be predicted and discriminated by the occurrence rate of the specific notification, but when a special notification occurs, the set value is narrowed down from the relationship with the continuation rate predicted and discriminated by the specific notification. Since the configuration is such that the setting value is performed, the degree of attention to the specific notification is further increased in the sense that the judgment material for predicting / determining the set value is acquired.

The "special notification means" can also be expressed as follows.

"Special notification means capable of executing special notification corresponding to special information (set value, AT set counter information) useful for the player (for example, suggestion effect setting processing by the display control device 81, lottery processing for the number of ending games, etc." , A function to execute processing to perform the suggestion effect of the AT set counter) ".

Feature B9. When the first set value (settings 1 and 2) is set by the setting means, the special notification by the special notification means is likely to be executed in the first mode (long number of ending games) in the first advantageous state. On the other hand, in the second advantageous state, the special notification by the special notification means is easily executed in the second mode (short number of ending games).
When a second set value (settings 5 and 6) different from the first set value is set by the setting means, in the first advantageous state, the special notification by the special notification means is performed in the second aspect. The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the special notification by the special notification means is easily executed in the first aspect in the second advantageous state.

The above configuration is one aspect of the specific configuration of feature B8, and the set value can be narrowed down according to the mode of special notification and the continuation rate (type of advantageous state) as in the above configuration. , It is possible to synergistically improve the degree of attention to specific notification.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to feature B8 or feature B9, wherein the special notification means has a configuration in which the special notification can be executed by performing the specific notification by the specific notification means.

As in the above configuration, by executing specific notifications with different occurrence probabilities according to the continuation rate, special notifications as setting suggestions can be executed, so that the psychology of the player who wants to grasp the set value can be obtained. By using it, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific notification as the previous step.

Feature B11. The special notification means executes the special notification in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, or executes the special notification when the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied is terminated. The gaming machine according to any one of features B8 to B10, which is characterized by having a configuration.

According to the above configuration, the situation of confirming the specific notification that is confirmed while expecting the advantageous state to continue for a long time and the special notification that is performed when the advantageous state ends as a setting suggestion are clearly distinguished. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an event in which both notifications are overlooked when trying to confirm both notifications, and it is also possible to preferably avoid an increase in processing load for causing both notifications in the same situation. It becomes possible. And, for example, even if the advantageous state ends with a small number of update times of the unit state, is it due to the fact that the end is a low continuation rate (first advantageous state) in the first place, or is it high? It is set by grasping by the time the special notification is executed whether it is caused by the fact that the continuation condition was not satisfied even though it was the continuation rate (second advantageous state). The configuration allows the value to be narrowed down. By doing so, it is possible to suitably increase the significance of predicting and grasping the continuation rate based on the specific notification, and even when the advantageous state ends, the continuation rate is grasped by then. If this is the case, the motivation for predicting the set value can be increased, and it becomes possible to switch feelings at the end of the advantageous state.

Feature B12. In one of the unit states, after the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means, a means for restricting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means (execution of a process of setting a generated flag by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, characterized in that it has a function of performing.

According to the above configuration, after the specific notification as the advance notification is executed in one unit state, the execution of the specific notification again is restricted. That is, in a configuration in which the higher the continuation rate of the unit state is, the more likely the specific notification is to occur, the higher the continuation rate is, the larger the number of games after the specific notification is performed until the unit state is updated. In other words, the lower the continuation rate, the smaller the number of games until the unit state is updated after the specific notification is performed, and the relatively large number of games until the specific notification is performed.

Here, assuming that the player is looking forward to the occurrence of the specific notification, the number of games in which the specific notification is expected to occur in one unit state, that is, the specific notification is generated. It is considered that the greater the number of games played, the more the excitement of the unit state can be fully enjoyed. In that respect, as described above, the lower the continuation rate, the greater the number of games until the specific notification is generated, so even in an advantageous state where the continuation rate is low, the feeling of excitement as to whether or not the specific notification is generated is fully felt. It will be a configuration that can be entertained. On the contrary, the higher the continuation rate, the smaller the number of games until the specific notification occurs in one unit state, but the more times the unit state is repeated, the more the specific notification in one unit state. It is possible to make up for the small number of games until the occurrence of. As a result of the above, at each continuation rate, it is possible to fully enjoy the game in which the specific notification is expected to occur.

The invention described in the above features B1 to B12 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and benefits are given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, the slot machine starts in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. When the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features B1 to B12, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10, and a part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A game progress means (execution of normal processing by the main control device 101) for advancing the game with the game starting based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ending based on the predetermined end condition being satisfied as one game. Function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player in a game advanced by the game progress means, and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that grants a privilege to a player according to a lottery result by the lottery means and a result of a game advanced by the game progressing means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
In the advantageous state, a predetermined number (18 games) or more of games are set as one unit state, and if the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, the next unit is executed after the execution of the unit state. On the other hand, if the continuation condition is not satisfied while shifting to the state, the advantageous state ends after the execution of the unit state.
In a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (for example, a specific combination such as cherry A), it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied, while the lottery is performed. When the lottery result by the means is a second result different from the first result (for example, a normal combination such as a push order bell), the establishment determination is not performed, or the continuation is performed as compared with the case of the first result. The establishment determination means (function of executing the AT addition process by the main control device 101) for executing the establishment determination so that the condition is less likely to be satisfied, and
In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the specific notification means (display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification corresponding to the satisfaction of the continuation condition before the unit state ends. (A function to execute processing to perform a specific effect) and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result is easier to perform the specific notification by the specific notification means than in a game in which the second result is the game.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the start operation by the player, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and the privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player is a so-called set management type state in which a specific number or more of games are set as a unit state and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. Has been done. Moreover, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, when the lottery result of the game is the first result, the establishment determination is made so that the continuation condition in the unit state is more likely to be satisfied than in the case of the second result. The degree of attention to the lottery result of each game in the unit state is preferably increased.

However, for example, from the specific number of games in the unit state and the winning probability of the first result, it may be rare that the first result is won in one unit state, and in such a configuration, it may be rare. There is a possibility that the player may not expect much from the establishment judgment that has been prepared. However, if the specific number is increased, the winning probability of the first result is made too high, or the winning probability of the success judgment is made too high, the ball output rate may rise. can not deny.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, a specific notification corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition can be generated before the unit state ends. Since the specific notification is set so that it is more likely to occur in the game that is the second result than the first result, is the continuation condition in the current unit state satisfied in the game that is the second result? It is possible to give an impression like. By doing so, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation for the establishment determination without increasing the specific number.

Feature C2. In a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means is the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition, the means for restricting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means (continuation command by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that the game is provided with a function of executing a process of not performing a specific effect if the specific effect lottery is not won, even if the game receives the above.

According to the above configuration, the execution of the specific notification is restricted in the game in which the result is satisfied corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition. Therefore, the case of the first result is more than the case of the second result. It is possible to make it difficult for the specific notification to be performed in the game, which is the first result, while the configuration is such that the result of the establishment determination is likely to be the establishment result. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game, which is the second result.

It should be noted that the above configuration does not deny that the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means in the game in which the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means is the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition, and at least The configuration may be such that the specific notification may not be executed in the game that is the result of establishment. However, the configuration may be such that the specific notification is not completely executed in the game that is the result of establishment, and in that case, the above-mentioned effect can be expected more clearly.

Feature C3. In the situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, the second establishment determination means (AT addition processing by the main control device 101) for determining the establishment of the continuation condition of the unit state after the next time of the unit state is executed. Function)
The specific notification means is a non-establishment means for causing the specific notification to be executed in a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means does not result in the establishment corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, which comprises (a function of executing a process of performing a specific effect based on receiving a non-winning command by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, if the result of the establishment judgment as the so-called addition judgment such as the establishment of the continuation condition from the next time onward is not the establishment result and the addition judgment is not won, the specific notification is executed in the game. Will be able to be. By doing so, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the specific notification while not making the continuation rate of the unit state too high, and it is possible to pay attention to the fact that the specific notification is performed in each game. It will be possible.

Feature C4. The second establishment determination means makes the establishment determination when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, while the establishment determination is made when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result. The configuration is such that the establishment determination is executed so that the continuation condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the case of not performing or the first result.
The non-establishment means causes the specific notification to be executed in a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means based on the first result does not result in the establishment result, while the second result. In a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means is not the establishment result, the specific notification is prevented from being executed, or the specific notification is less likely to be executed than in the case based on the first result. The gaming machine according to feature C3, which is characterized in that it is set to.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, the specific notification is likely to be executed when a non-winning result is determined by the second establishment determination means based on the first result. By doing so, it is possible to increase the occurrence rate of the specific notification without increasing the winning probability of the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means too much. Moreover, since the first result is more likely to win the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means than the second result, the association between the first result and the specific notification is made. It is easy to perform, and it is possible to improve the reliability of the specific notification at the time of the first result (the reliability that the continuation condition is satisfied based on the first result of this time).

Feature C5. In the unit state, after executing the predetermined notification, any of the advantageous contents corresponding to the fact that the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied and the non-advantageous content corresponding to the fact that the continuation condition is not satisfied. Correspondence notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a battle effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a response notification that executes the content notification of
Even when the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means is the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition, in the game corresponding to the execution of the correspondence notification by the correspondence notification means, the said A means for restricting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means (a function of executing a process of not performing the specific effect during the battle effect by the display control device 81), and
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, in a game in which a response notification is performed such that the success or failure of the continuation condition is notified by the content notification of the advantageous content or the non-advantageous content after the predetermined notification, the game continues as a result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means. Even if the condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific notification is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to preferably avoid a decrease in interest in the prepared response notification.

Feature C6. The response notification means is a means for changing the content notification in the response notification to the advantageous content when the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means becomes the establishment result after the response notification is started. The gaming machine according to feature C5, which comprises, for example, a function of executing the processes of steps S2014 and S2015 as a process for rewriting a battle by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, even if the execution of the specific notification is restricted when the continuation condition is satisfied during the response notification, the content notification in the response notification is rewritten, so that the response notification and the continuation condition are successful or unsuccessful. It is possible to prevent a contradiction with.

Feature C7. In a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means is the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition, the means for allowing the specific notification to be executed by the specific notification means (continuation command by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a process of performing a specific effect in the game in which the game is received.

According to the above configuration, the execution of the specific notification may be permitted in the game for which the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition is satisfied. Therefore, the case of the first result is the first. In the configuration in which the result of the establishment determination is more likely to be the establishment result than in the case of the two results, and in the configuration in which the second result is easier to perform the specific notification than in the case of the first result, the first It is possible to make it possible to perform specific notification even in the resulting game. By doing so, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort in the production, such as the fact that the specific notification is not executed even though the first result as a so-called rare role is won.

It should be noted that the above configuration denies that the specific notification is not executed by the specific notification means (configuration of the feature C2) in the game in which the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means is the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition. It is not a thing, and it may be a configuration in which a specific notification may be executed at least in a game that results in establishment. However, in the game that results in the establishment, the specific notification may be always executed.

Feature C8. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the execution determination means (executes the specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) that determines the execution of the specific notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means. Function)
The execution determination means makes the execution determination regardless of whether or not the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means is the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition in this game. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7.

According to the above configuration, regardless of whether or not the game satisfies the continuation condition by the establishment determination by the establishment determination means, the execution determination of the specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of the lottery means in the current game. By doing so, it is possible to set the occurrence rate of the specific notification separately from the winning probability in the establishment judgment, and adjust the occurrence rate, even though the establishment judgment is made according to the lottery result of each game. It is possible to expect the effect of the feature C1 by doing so.

Feature C9. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the execution determination means (executes the specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) that determines the execution of the specific notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means. Function)
The lottery means performs the lottery so as to obtain the first result with the first probability, and performs the lottery so as to obtain the second result with a second probability higher than the first probability. It is a thing
The execution determination means performs the execution determination so as to result in executing the specific notification with a third probability in the case of the first result, and the third probability in the case of the second result. The execution determination is performed so that the result is that the specific notification is executed with a fourth probability, which is a lower probability.
The product of the second probability and the fourth probability (continuation) rather than the product of the first probability and the third probability (0.8% if the continuation rate is 10%, 1.0% if the continuation rate is 90%). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, characterized in that the ratio is set to be 5.5% when the rate is 10% and 13.3% when the continuation rate is 90% (Fig. 51). ..

According to the above configuration, there is a first result and a second result that is easier to win than that, and the execution judgment of the specific notification triggered by the first result is the execution of the specific notification triggered by the second result. In a configuration that is easier to win than the judgment, the second result is more than the product of the winning probability of the first result (first probability) and the winning probability of the execution judgment of the specific notification triggered by the first result (third probability). Since the product of the winning probability (second probability) and the winning probability (fourth probability) of the execution judgment of the specific notification triggered by the second result is set to be larger, it is substantially the first. The configuration is such that the specific notification triggered by the second result is more likely to occur than the specific notification triggered by the first result. By doing so, although it is easy to execute the specific notification triggered by the first result as a so-called rare role, there are not many chances that the specific notification is actually executed without winning the first result. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of not occurring. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the specific notification will be performed even if the second result is relatively easy to win as the lottery result of the game, and the configuration is such that the effect of improving the degree of attention using the specific notification is preferably achieved. It will be possible.

The invention described in the above features C1 to C9 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. When the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features C1 to C9, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10, and a part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A game progress means (execution of normal processing by the main control device 101) for advancing the game with the game starting based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ending based on the predetermined end condition being satisfied as one game. Function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player in a game advanced by the game progress means, and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that grants a privilege to a player according to a lottery result by the lottery means and a result of a game advanced by the game progressing means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Based on a predetermined determination opportunity, an advantage determination means (continuation determination process or AT addition process by the main control device 101) for executing an advantage determination for causing an advantageous event (AT mode set continuation) that is advantageous for the player is performed. Function to execute) and
When the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous result corresponding to causing the advantageous event, the advantageous execution means (AT mode by the main control device 101) that causes the advantageous event at a predetermined specific timing. Processing to start a new set in the processing, for example, the function to execute the processing of steps S1404 to S1406) and
Execution determination means for performing an execution determination of executing a specific notification corresponding to the advantageous result in a specific situation in which the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result and is prior to the specific timing. (A function to execute a specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) and
Based on the determination result by the execution determination means, the specific notification means (function of executing the specific effect setting process by the display control device 81) for executing the specific notification, and
In the specific situation, after the execution of the predetermined notification (for example, ally attack effect or enemy attack effect), the advantage content (ally victory effect) corresponding to the result of the advantage determination is not the advantage result. A function to execute a process for performing a battle effect by the response notification means (display control device 81) capable of performing a response notification that executes one of the content notifications including the non-advantageous content (enemy victory effect) corresponding to the above. )When,
In a situation where the corresponding notification is performed by the corresponding notification means, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means (specific effect setting process according to the value of the sub-side AT counter by the display control device 81). (Function to execute processing etc.) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the start operation by the player, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and the privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, an advantageous determination is made to generate an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player, and when the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result, an advantageous event occurs at a predetermined specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game by adding the game property that causes an advantageous event in the game property such as obtaining a privilege in each game.

In such playability, depending on the advantage of the advantageous event, the player's interest is concentrated on the advantageous judgment that causes the advantageous event rather than the lottery result of each game and the privilege grant based on the lottery result. It is undeniable that there is a possibility that the slot machine, in which the player's operation is involved in the start of the game and the granting of benefits, will be neglected. In particular, when the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result, the game until the advantageous event occurs becomes a game waiting for the advantageous event, and the interest of the player may be greatly reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, it is possible to execute the specific notification corresponding to the advantageous result in the specific situation after the result of the advantageous determination that causes the advantageous event becomes the advantageous result but before the advantageous event occurs. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the specific notification is performed in each game before the advantageous event occurs. Further, in a specific situation, after the predetermined notification is executed, the content notification including the advantageous content corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination being the advantageous result and the non-advantageous content corresponding to the non-advantageous result is performed. Is executed, so that when a predetermined notification is made, it is made to pay attention to which content notification is performed, and it is directed according to the progress of the game toward a specific timing when an advantageous event occurs. It will be possible to greatly excite.

On the other hand, in the response notification in which the result of the advantage determination is notified by the final content notification as described above, the content is based on the notification content (predetermined notification mode) in the game prior to the game in which the content notification is performed. The notification may be predicted to some extent, and if a specific notification corresponding to an advantageous result is performed during the corresponding notification, the interest in the content notification is diminished and the degree of attention to the game is extremely reduced. There is a possibility that it will end up.

On the other hand, there is also a need for a player who expects a specific notification to be an advance notification of an advantageous event, and there is a concern that a game opportunity may be lost due to a configuration in which the specific notification is not performed.

Therefore, in the above configuration, since the execution of the specific notification is restricted only during the response notification, the specific notification can be performed in a specific situation after the advantageous determination is made until the advantageous event occurs. The game and the game in which the corresponding notification is not performed and the corresponding notification is performed can be clearly distinguished, and the effect of both notifications is preferable while preventing the inconvenience caused by the overlapping of the corresponding notification and the specific notification. It becomes possible to expect.

Feature D2. The games executed in the specific situation include a first specific game in which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means, and a game after the first specific game in which the specific notification means is executed. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein is restricted by the limiting means, and a second specific game in which the corresponding notification is performed by the corresponding notification means is set.

According to the above configuration, the response notification in which the result of the advantageous determination is notified by the content notification after the predetermined notification is performed in the second specific game in the specific situation, and is performed in the first specific game before the second specific game. Therefore, the specific notification corresponding to the advantageous result can be performed. That is, after the advantage determination is made, after the game in which the specific notification that deterministically notifies the result of the advantage determination can be performed, the corresponding notification that the result of the advantage determination is notified by the content notification via the predetermined notification is provided. The game to be executed is set. By doing so, the specific notification is performed after the response notification of the advantageous content is performed, or the specific notification is not performed even though the response notification of the advantageous content is performed. It is possible to expect the effect of both notifications while preventing duplication and contradiction.

Feature D3. A plurality of modes of the predetermined notification in the response notification by the response notification means are set, and a selection means (from the battle effect table by the display control device 81) for selecting the mode of the predetermined notification this time from the plurality of set modes. It has a function to execute the process of selecting the production table this time).
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein the selection means can select the mode of the predetermined notification regardless of whether or not the specific notification means is executed by the specific notification means.

According to the above configuration, when the selection means selects the mode of the predetermined notification by the corresponding notification means, it is not necessary to grasp whether or not the specific notification is executed. Therefore, the processing configuration of the selection means is overwhelmingly simple, and it is not necessary to store the predetermined notification of the pattern when the specific notification is executed, which can contribute to the reduction of the storage capacity.

Further, for example, in the case of a configuration premised on the specific notification, when the specific notification occurs, a definite notification mode for notifying that the continuation condition is satisfied at the time of the content notification is selected in the response notification. When such a mode is prepared, for example, when the specific notification is overlooked even though such a mode is selected, the specific notification is overlooked in the definite notification mode. Inconveniences such as the player being informed of this afterwards may occur. Then, from the viewpoint of preventing the specific notification from being overlooked, there may be a situation in which the specific notification must be set in a flashy production mode. On the other hand, as in the above configuration, by setting the effect mode in which the response notification is not premised on the specific notification, it is possible to set the mode of the mode notification in a mode in which the oversight of the specific notification can be tolerated. The configuration is such that the specific notification itself does not have to be so flashy. Therefore, it is possible to make the mode so that the occurrence of the specific notification cannot be grasped unless the specific notification is faced more carefully, and it is preferable to pay attention to the game production by utilizing the player's psychology to miss the specific notification. It becomes possible to increase to.

Feature D4. A plurality of modes of the predetermined notification in the response notification by the response notification means are set, and a selection means (from the battle effect table by the display control device 81) for selecting the mode of the predetermined notification this time from the plurality of set modes. It has a function to execute the process of selecting the production table this time).
The selection means has a configuration of selecting the predetermined mode of notification, which becomes a predetermined specific mode when the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means.
The selection means has the feature D1 or the feature D2 that it is possible to select the predetermined mode of the predetermined notification which is the specific mode even when the specific notification is not executed by the specific notification means. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when the selection means selects the predetermined notification mode by the corresponding notification means, the predetermined notification mode that becomes the specific mode is selected if the specific notification is executed. By doing so, with the execution of the specific notification, the mode of the predetermined notification is defined as one mode, so that the processing configuration can be simplified. Moreover, since the predetermined notification mode that is the specific mode can be selected even when the specific notification is not executed, the predetermined notification mode that is the specific mode is dedicated to the case where the specific notification is executed. It is possible to contribute to the reduction of the storage capacity as compared with the configuration prepared as, and there is no need to make the specific notification flashy in order to prevent the specific notification from being overlooked. Can also be increased.

Feature D5. The game according to feature D4, wherein specific information (AT mode continuation rate, set value) that may be useful to the player is suggested by the predetermined notification mode selected by the selection means. Machine.

According to the above configuration, assuming that the specific information is suggested by the predetermined notification mode selected by the selection means, the predetermined notification mode selected by the selection means is unique by executing the specific notification. In the configuration of the feature D4 which is a specific mode (specific mode), the player may not be able to know the specific information due to the specific notification. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it difficult to know the specific information as a consideration for the specific notification while looking forward to it.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the specific information is suggested by the mode (occurrence rate) of the specific notification by the specific notification means.

With the above configuration, by performing the specific notification, the specific information is not suggested by the mode of the predetermined notification, but the specific information is suggested from the mode of the specific notification. As a player who wants to know, he / she will pay more attention to specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention of the game.

Feature D7. Even if the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is the advantage result, the specific notification may not be executed by the specific notification means, while the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is performed. Described in any one of features D1 to D6, wherein when the result is the advantageous result, the content notification in the corresponding notification by the corresponding notification means is set so as not to have the non-advantageous content. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, if the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result, the response notification always has an advantageous content, but the specific notification may not be executed. By doing so, it is possible to know how the content notification is by the specific notification, while basically assuming that the result of the advantage judgment is clearly notified by the response notification. The specific notification can be interpreted as an auxiliary notification of the corresponding notification. Therefore, it is possible to provide a profitable feeling of knowing how the content notification is by the specific notification, and it is possible to look forward to the specific notification.

Feature D8. In the game executed in the specific situation, it is provided with a game notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a confrontation effect by the display control device 81) that notifies the game by a predetermined notification means.
The specific notification means executes a part of the game notification by the game notification means from a normal mode (for example, VS display in white characters) to a specific mode (for example, VS display in red characters) as the specific notification. It is a composition,
The game notification means can execute the game notification in the normal mode when the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is the advantage result, and the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is the advantage. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the game notification can be executed in the normal mode when the result is different from the result.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed by changing a part of the game notifications performed in each game from the normal mode to the specific mode. In this case, the game notification in the normal mode is executed even when the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result, and is executed even when the result is not an advantageous result. In other words, even if the specific notification is not performed, it does not indicate that it is not an advantageous result, and the specific notification is overlooked because only a part of the game notification is changed to a specific mode. It is more likely that you will be affected. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game production by utilizing the psychology of the player who misses the specific notification.

Feature D9. The feature D1 to D8 is characterized in that the execution determination means is configured to determine the execution of the specific notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the game executed in the specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the above configuration, the execution determination of the specific notification is made based on the lottery result of each game in the specific situation. By doing so, the specific notification and the lottery result of each game are closely related. For example, an advantageous judgment is made based on the lottery result in the game in which the specific notification is generated, and the advantageous judgment results in an advantageous result. It is also possible to give the impression that it was.

Feature D10. The predetermined notification is configured to be executed over a plurality of games.
A notification mode information storage means (various table storage areas 182a by the display control device 81) that stores a notification mode information group (battle effect table) in which a plurality of types of notification modes of the predetermined notification over the plurality of games are set.
A notification mode selection means (display) that selects a notification mode of a predetermined notification in the corresponding notification from the notification mode information group stored in the notification mode information storage means based on the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means. The function to execute the process of selecting the battle production table this time by the control device 81) and
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the corresponding notification means executes the predetermined notification based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection means.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined notification in the corresponding notification is executed over a plurality of games, and the predetermined notification is in a notification mode selected from the notification mode information group based on the result of the advantageous determination. Will be done. Here, in a configuration in which predetermined notification is performed over a plurality of games, if the specific notification may be performed in the game that executes the predetermined notification, it is necessary to determine the notification mode of the predetermined notification in each game. However, if the configuration is not such that the notification mode of the predetermined notification is determined in each game, there is a possibility that the specific notification to be executed and the subsequent content notification cannot be matched. In that respect, since the execution of the specific notification is restricted in the game that executes the corresponding notification as described above, it is not necessary to determine the notification mode of the predetermined notification in each game, and the configuration is relatively simple. It becomes possible to perform correspondence notification.

Feature D11. A first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the probability that the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means becomes the advantageous result is set are set. Ori,
A feature D1 to D10, wherein the execution determination means performs the execution determination so that the probability of the result of executing the specific notification differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the specific notification will be different depending on the winning probability of the advantageous judgment, and a game such as predicting the winning probability of the advantageous judgment through the occurrence rate of the specific notification will be added. Become. By doing so, it is possible not only to grasp the result of the advantageous judgment by performing the specific notification, but also to predict the winning probability of the advantageous judgment, and it is possible to preferably pay attention to the specific notification. It becomes possible to increase.

The invention described in the above features D1 to D11 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. When the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features D1 to D11, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10, and a part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A game progress means (execution of normal processing by the main control device 101) for advancing the game with the game starting based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ending based on the predetermined end condition being satisfied as one game. Function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player in a game advanced by the game progress means, and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that grants a privilege to a player according to a lottery result by the lottery means and a result of a game advanced by the game progressing means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
The advantageous state is configured so that a specific number (18 games) or more of games can be executed as a unit state (AT set), and if the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, after the execution of the unit state, after the execution of the unit state, While shifting to the next unit state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the execution of the unit state.
In the advantageous state, a special number (10 games) of games less than the specific number is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and if the notification continuation condition of the unit notification state is satisfied, the said A notification control means that starts the next unit notification state after the end of the unit notification state, but does not start the next unit notification state after the end of the unit notification state if the continuation condition for notification is not satisfied. (A function to execute a process for performing a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81) and
When the continuation condition for notification in the unit notification state is satisfied, the specific notification means (pseudo-set effect by the display control device 81) that executes a predetermined specific notification (specific effect) in the unit notification state is the third. (A function to execute processing to perform a specific effect or a fourth specific effect),
When the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit notification state. Means to enable (a function to execute a process of shifting to the next pseudo set based on the third specific effect or the fourth specific effect in the pseudo set effect by the display control device 81), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the start operation by the player, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and the privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player is a so-called set management type state in which a specific number or more of games are set as a unit state and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. Has been done. Moreover, in the advantageous state, a special number of games smaller than a specific number, which is the number of continuous games in the unit state, is set as one unit notification state, and if the notification continuation condition of the unit notification state is satisfied, the unit notification state is set. After the end, the next unit notification state is started, and if the notification continuation condition of the unit notification state is not satisfied, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state, which is advantageous. The number of repetitions of the unit notification state tends to be larger than the number of repetitions of the unit state in the state, and the unit does not increase the advantage too much by not making it too easy to satisfy the continuation condition of the unit state in the advantageous state. By increasing the number of repetitions of the notification state, it is possible to make it appear as if the continuation condition is easily satisfied.

However, in such a configuration in which the unit notification state, which is the number of games smaller than the number of games in the unit state, is repeated, it is difficult to combine the game in which the unit state ends and the game in which the unit notification state ends. There is. More specifically, there are a specific number that is the number of games in the unit state, a special number that is the number of games in the unit notification state, a game in which the unit state ends unless it is a common divisor, and a game in which the unit notification state ends. There is a possibility that they do not match and the effect of the unit notification state cannot be expected to be suitable.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the notification continuation condition is satisfied in the unit notification state, the specific notification is executed, and the specific notification is triggered by the specific notification regardless of the number of remaining games in the unit notification state. Since the notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started, it becomes easy to match the number of games in the unit notification state with the number of games in the unit state. Therefore, the effect of repeating the unit notification state with a smaller number of games than the unit state can be preferably expected.

Feature E2. When the continuation condition is satisfied in the unit state, a means for limiting the termination of the unit state in a situation where the number of games remaining in the unit state exists (AT game counter by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a process of preventing the AT mode set from being updated before becomes 0.

According to the above configuration, the unit notification state side terminates the unit notification state and starts the next unit notification state regardless of the number of remaining games in the unit notification state, while the unit state side starts the next unit notification state. Is restricted from ending the unit state and starting the next unit state in a situation where the remaining number of games in the unit state exists even if the continuation condition is satisfied. In this way, by adjusting only the number of games on the unit notification state side to match the number of games in both states, it is possible to match the number of games in both states with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature E3. The specific notification means is for generating a specific effect when updating a set that has not received a continuation command by the display control device 81, that is, the first means that executes the specific notification according to the number of remaining games in the unit state. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, which comprises a function of executing processing).

According to the above configuration, the unit notification state is updated by generating a specific notification according to the number of remaining games on the unit state side, so that the number of remaining games in the unit state and the number of continuous games in the unit notification state (special number). ) And can be adjusted without discomfort.

Feature E4. The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein the first means executes the specific notification in a game in which the number of remaining games in the unit state is larger than the special number.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific notification is performed to end the unit notification state and the next unit notification state is started, the number of special numbers in the next unit notification state is consumed by the time the remaining number of games in the unit state is exhausted. It becomes possible to digest the number of games. Therefore, for example, an event such as the unit state ending in the middle of the unit notification state does not occur, and the number of remaining games in the unit state and the number of continuous games in the unit notification state can be adjusted without discomfort. ..

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to feature E3 or feature E4, wherein the first means executes the specific notification according to the number of remaining games in the unit state in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. ..

In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, even after the remaining number of games in the unit state is exhausted, there are more than a specific number of games in the next unit state. Therefore, in the above configuration, since the opportunity to perform the specific notification according to the remaining number of games is limited to the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, the execution of the process for performing the specific notification according to the remaining number of games is executed. The frequency can be reduced, and the processing can be simplified.

Feature E6. The specific notification means is a second means (third specific effect lottery by the display control device 81) that executes the specific notification regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit state in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, which is characterized by having (a function of executing processing for performing these specific effects) based on the fourth specific effect lottery.

In the unit state where the continuation condition is satisfied, even after the remaining number of games in the unit state is exhausted, there are more than a specific number of games in the next unit state, and no matter when the specific notification is executed, the specific notification is executed. It is possible to digest a special number of games in the next unit notification state. Therefore, in the above configuration, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, randomness is generated in the execution timing of the specific notification by executing the specific notification regardless of the number of remaining games. It becomes difficult to understand when the specific notification is performed and the unit notification state is updated, and it becomes possible to diversify the production.

Feature E7. The second means is an execution determination means (display control) that determines execution of executing the specific notification according to the lottery result by the lottery means in each game in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied. The specific notification according to feature E6, which is provided with a function of executing a third specific effect lottery process and a fourth specific effect lottery process by the device 81, and executes the specific notification based on a determination result by the execution determination means. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the execution determination of the specific notification is made according to the lottery result of each game, so it is as if the continuation condition was satisfied by the lottery result of each game. It is possible to give such an impression to the player. Therefore, the degree of attention to each game can be suitably increased.

Feature E8. The specific notification means is a third means (pseudo set by the display control device 81) that executes the specific notification when the game in the unit notification state reaches the special number in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, which is characterized by having a function of executing a process for performing a third specific effect or a fourth specific effect in the final game of the above.

According to the above configuration, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the unit notification state ends without the specific notification being performed by executing the specific notification in the final game of the unit notification state. It is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of doing so. In this case, regardless of the number of games in the unit state that the final game in the unit notification state for performing the specific notification is, there are enough games to digest the next unit notification state after the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the number of games between the unit state and the unit notification state without difficulty.

Feature E9. In the unit notification state, the special number of games are executed without the specific notification being performed, and after the unit notification state ends, a predetermined end notification is executed in the game up to the end game in which the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that it includes end notification means (a function of executing a process for performing an ending effect by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, even if the game in which the unit state ends and the game in which the unit notification state ends do not completely match, the difference can be filled by a predetermined end notification. With such a configuration, it is possible to reasonably adjust the number of games between the unit state and the unit notification state.

Feature E10. The end notification means can execute the predetermined end notification over the first number of games, and can execute the predetermined end notification over a second number of games different from the first number. The gaming machine according to feature E9, characterized in that it is present.

According to the above configuration, the number of games of the predetermined end notification can be the first number or the second number, and the number of games from the end of the unit notification state to the end of the unit state is There is no need for a uniform number of games. By doing so, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the number of games in the unit notification state is matched with the number of games in the unit state with a relatively simple configuration.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"When the number of games from the end of the unit notification state to the end of the advantageous state is the first number, the end notification means will notify the end of the predetermined end over the first number of games. If the number of games from the end of the unit notification state to the end of the advantageous state is a second number different from the first number, the predetermined number of games is over the second number. The gaming machine according to the feature E9, which is characterized by notifying the end of the game.

Feature E11. A plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the privilege given by the privilege giving means are set, and a setting value of one of the plurality of setting values is set. Equipped with means (a function of executing a winning probability setting process by the main control device 101)
When the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the specific notification means digests the special number of games in the unit notification state without performing the specific notification. After the unit notification state ends, the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state before the end unit notification state so that the number of end games up to the end game at which the advantageous state ends tends to be the first number. When the set value set by the setting means is a second set value different from the first set value, the end game number is likely to be a second number different from the first number. A fourth means capable of executing the specific notification in the unit notification state before the unit notification state (the third specific effect is performed based on the result of the lottery process of the number of ending games by the display control device 81. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of performing the processing, FIG. 79).

According to the above configuration, the number of games (the number of finished games) of the difference between the unit notification state and the end game of the unit state is likely to differ depending on the set value, and the set value is predicted from the number of games of the difference. Innovative playability can be realized.

Feature E12. As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the continuation condition of the unit state is more likely to be satisfied than the first advantageous state. ) And is set,
The fourth means is
In the first advantageous state, when the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the end unit notification state is set so that the end game number is likely to be the first number. When the specific notification is executed in the previous unit notification state and the set value set by the setting means is the second set value, the end game number is likely to be the second number. The specific notification is executed in the unit notification state before the end unit notification state, and the specific notification is executed.
In the second advantageous state, when the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the end unit notification state is set so that the end game number is likely to be the second number. When the specific notification is executed in the previous unit notification state and the set value set by the setting means is the second set value, the end game number is likely to be the first number. The gaming machine according to feature E11, wherein the specific notification can be executed in the unit notification state before the end unit notification state.

According to the above configuration, the set value indicated by the number of games (the number of end games) of the difference between the unit notification state and the end game of the unit state is different between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state having different continuation conditions. ing. In other words, in order to narrow down the set values, it is not enough to simply grasp the number of difference games, but it is necessary to grasp which advantageous state is in advance before that. Become. By doing so, the playability in the advantageous state can be suitably improved.

Feature E13. The specific notification means is a second means (third specific effect lottery by the display control device 81) that executes the specific notification regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit state in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied. And a function to execute processing to perform these specific effects based on the 4th specific effect lottery)
The second means is an execution determination means (display control) that determines execution of executing the specific notification according to the lottery result by the lottery means in each game in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied. The device 81 is provided with a function of executing the third specific effect lottery process and the fourth specific effect lottery process), and executes the specific notification based on the determination result by the execution determination means.
The feature E12 is characterized in that the execution determination means determines the execution of the specific notification so that the probability of the result of executing the specific notification differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. Described gaming machine.

In the unit state where the continuation condition is satisfied, even after the remaining number of games in the unit state is exhausted, there are more than a specific number of games in the next unit state, and no matter when the specific notification is executed, the specific notification is executed. It is possible to digest a special number of games in the next unit notification state. Therefore, in the above configuration, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, randomness is generated in the execution timing of the specific notification by executing the specific notification regardless of the number of remaining games. It becomes difficult to understand when the specific notification is performed and the unit notification state is updated, and it becomes possible to diversify the production.

Moreover, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the execution determination of the specific notification is made according to the lottery result of each game, so that the impression is as if the continuation condition was satisfied by the lottery result of each game. It becomes possible to give to the player. Therefore, the degree of attention to each game can be suitably increased.

Not only that, since the execution determination of the specific notification is performed so that the winning probability differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, it stays in any advantageous state based on the occurrence rate of the specific notification. The player can predict whether or not. By doing so, in the middle of the advantageous state, the type of the advantageous state can be grasped from the occurrence rate of the specific notification in the unit notification state, and when the unit notification state ends, the difference between the number of games until the end of the advantageous state and the number of games , It is possible to realize an interesting game playability such as predicting a set value from the predicted type of advantageous state and the predicted value.

The invention described in the above features E1 to E13 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. When the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features E1 to E13, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10, and a part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A game progress means (execution of normal processing by the main control device 101) for advancing the game with the game starting based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ending based on the predetermined end condition being satisfied as one game. Function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player in a game advanced by the game progress means, and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that grants a privilege to a player according to a lottery result by the lottery means and a result of a game advanced by the game progressing means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
In the advantageous state, a special number (10 games) of games is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. When the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. A control means (a function of executing a process for performing a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81) and
When the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is larger than the special number, the first means (start of a set in which the continuation command by the display control device 81 is not received) is such that the specific notification is performed in the unit notification state. A function that executes the process of updating the pseudo set in the game) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the start operation by the player, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and the privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, a special number of games is set to one unit notification state, and when a specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. Then, the next unit notification state is started, and if a special number of games are executed without specific notification being performed in the unit notification state, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. Therefore, the player can grasp that the advantageous state continues as long as the unit notification state is repeated, and can expect that the specific notification is performed in the unit notification state.

However, in a configuration in which the continuation of such an advantageous state is notified by repeating the unit notification state, if the advantageous state ends despite the existence of the remaining number of games in the unit notification state, the premise is in the first place. It collapses, and the reliability of the notification according to the unit notification state is greatly reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is larger than the special number, the unit notification state is updated by the specific notification, and a new unit notification is performed. In the state, it becomes possible to digest all the special number of games, and it is possible to end the advantageous state in the situation where there is no remaining number of games in the unit notification state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably expect the effect of the notification of the unit notification state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. In a situation where the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is larger than the special number, the execution determination means (the third specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) for determining the execution of the specific notification in the unit notification state A function of executing the fourth specific effect lottery process) is provided, and when the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is the corresponding result corresponding to the execution of the specific notification, the specific notification is performed. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that it is provided with a second means (a functional ability to execute a process for performing a specific effect based on the lottery result of each specific effect lottery by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number, a specific notification is uniformly generated and the unit notification state is updated, but before the special number is reached, each game A specific notification is generated based on the execution determination of, and the unit notification status is updated. By doing so, it becomes difficult to understand when a specific notification occurs in each game in the unit notification state, and it is possible to preferably realize game playability in which the continuation of the advantageous state is grasped by repeating the unit notification state. Become.

Feature F3. When a predetermined trigger (update of AT set) occurs in the advantageous state, after executing a predetermined number of games larger than the special number, the end determination means (main control device) that determines the end to end the advantageous state. It has a function to execute the continuation judgment process by 101).
The first means is the unit notification state when the result of the end determination by the end determination means is the end result (discontinuation) corresponding to the termination of the advantageous state after executing the predetermined number of games. The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or the feature F2, characterized in that the specific notification is performed in the above.

According to the above configuration, the end determination means is configured to perform an end determination to end the advantageous state after a predetermined number of games, and when the result of the end determination is the end result, a specific notification is performed and the unit is The notification status is updated. With such a configuration, the first means in the specific notification means may perform the specific notification based on the determination result of the end determination means, and the first means must always grasp the number of remaining games in the advantageous state. The processing configuration can be simplified, such as eliminating the problem.

Feature F4. At least the first control device (main control device 101) having the end determination means, and
A second control device (display control device 81) having at least the notification control means and provided separately from the first control device,
The gaming machine according to the feature F3, which is characterized by having.

If the end determination means and the specific notification means (particularly the first means) are provided in separate control devices as in the above configuration, the effect of the feature F3 can be more preferably achieved by decentralizing the functions. be able to.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or feature F4, wherein the predetermined trigger occurs every time the predetermined number of games are executed.

According to the above configuration, the end determination means is configured to perform end determination for each predetermined number of games without performing end determination for each game. By doing so, the frequency of end determination can be reduced, and the processing load can be suppressed.

Feature F6. The notification control means is a third means (display) for causing the specific notification to be performed in the unit notification state when the result of the end determination by the end determination means is different from the end result (continuation). The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F5, which comprises a function of executing a process for performing a specific effect when the AT set is updated by the control device 81).

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the end determination is not the end result, the specific notification may be performed by the third means. Therefore, the specific notification by the first means is performed by the specific notification by the third means. It will be possible to camouflage well, and it will be less likely to be a sign that the specific notification will end with the remaining predetermined number of games. In this way, it can be expected that the advantageous state will continue even if the specific notification is performed.

Feature F7. The first means is configured to perform the specific notification in the unit notification state when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is a predetermined number larger than the special number.
A special notification means (processing for performing an ending effect or a jackpot effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a predetermined special notification over the number of games of the difference between the predetermined number and the special number. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, characterized in that it has a function to execute).

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is performed by the first means, the number of games remaining in the advantageous state is a predetermined number, and among them, the special number of games is the unit notification state after being updated by the specific notification. Is performed, and special notification is performed over the number of games that is the difference between the predetermined number and the special number. By doing so, even if the predetermined number and the special number do not completely match, it is possible to prevent a blank period in the production from occurring.

Feature F8. The special notification means is described in feature F7, wherein the special notification means executes the special notification after the next unit notification state of the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means is completed. Amusement machine.

According to the above configuration, the special notification is performed after the next unit notification state updated by the specific notification, and the advantageous state ends when the special notification ends. That is, the special notification is an effect indicating the end of the advantageous state, and the game from the end of the effect by the unit notification state to the end of the advantageous state is supplemented by the so-called ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the production during the period when the unit notification state is not performed without any discomfort.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The special notification means executes the special notification indicating that the advantageous state ends after the next unit notification state of the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means ends. The gaming machine according to the feature F7, which is characterized in that.

Feature F9. The special notification means executes the special notification in a game between the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means and the next unit notification state of the unit notification state. The gaming machine according to the feature F7.

According to the above configuration, special notification is performed in the game between the unit notification state updated by the specific notification and the next unit notification state, and the advantageous state is reached when the next unit notification state ends. Is finished. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the advantageous state ends if the specific notification is not performed during the unit notification state, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the specific notification. .. In this case, the special notification corresponds to a jackpot effect indicating that a specific notification occurs in the unit notification state and shifts to the next unit notification state, and the effect during the period when the unit notification state is not performed is uncomfortable. Can be entertained without.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"In the special notification means, the unit notification state is updated by a game between the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means and the next unit notification state of the unit notification state. The gaming machine according to feature F7, characterized in that the special notification indicating that the game is played is executed. "

Further, the above-mentioned "special notification" is not limited to the game between the unit notification state terminated by the specific notification by the first means and the next unit notification state, and the unit is terminated by the specific notification by other means. By configuring the special notification to be performed even in the game between the notification state and the next unit notification state, it is possible to strongly get the impression that the special notification is a notification indicating that the unit notification state can be updated. Is possible.

Feature F10. The first means is configured to perform the specific notification in the unit notification state when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is a predetermined number larger than the special number.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the predetermined number is twice or less of the special number.

According to the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number, a specific notification is performed to end the unit notification state, and then the unit notification state is started from the next game, the unit notification state is changed. When the special number of games is exhausted, the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is less than the special number. That is, when the unit notification state over a special number of games cannot be digested twice but at least once can be digested, the specific notification by the first means comes to be performed. Therefore, it suffices to end the production by the unit notification state after performing the unit notification state for one time without updating (without generating a specific notification), and the advantageous state ends during the unit notification state. It is possible to prevent such an event as occurring.

Feature F11. The gaming machine according to feature F10, wherein the predetermined number is one more than the special number.

According to the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number, a specific notification is performed to end the unit notification state, and then the unit notification state is started from the next game. The number of remaining games in the advantageous state becomes 0 when the number of games is exhausted over a special number of games. By doing so, it is possible to match the end game in the advantageous state and the end game in the production by the unit notification state.

The invention described in the above features F1 to F11 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and benefits are given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, the slot machine starts in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. When the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features F1 to F11, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10, and a part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A game progress means (execution of normal processing by the main control device 101) for advancing the game with the game starting based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ending based on the predetermined end condition being satisfied as one game. Function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player in a game advanced by the game progress means, and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that grants a privilege to a player according to a lottery result by the lottery means and a result of a game advanced by the game progressing means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, an AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the number of games tends to be larger than that of the first advantageous state. And are set,
In the advantageous state, a special number (10 games) of games is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. When the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. It is equipped with a control means (a function of executing a process for performing a pseudo-set effect by the display control device 81).
When the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the average number of executed games executed in the unit notification state is larger in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized by being set to.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the start operation by the player, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and the privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, a special number of games is set to one unit notification state, and when a specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. Then, the next unit notification state is started, and if a special number of games are executed without specific notification being performed in the unit notification state, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. Therefore, the player can grasp that the advantageous state continues as long as the unit notification state is repeated, and can expect that the specific notification is performed in the unit notification state.

As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the number of continuous games is different are set, and the unit notification state in the second advantageous state is a unit than the unit notification state in these first advantageous states. It is set so that the average number of executed games as the number of staying games in the unit notification state when the specific notification is performed in the notification state is large.

In this case, since the number of staying games in the unit notification state is larger in the second advantageous state in which the number of continuous games tends to be longer than in the first advantageous state, the number of games in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is assumed to be the same. When it continues, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state tends to be larger in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. Then, even if the second advantageous state continues for a longer time than the first advantageous state, the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is the difference in the number of continuous games between the second advantageous state and the first advantageous state. It is possible to make it look smaller than the difference. In this way, the difference in the number of games in the advantageous state can be made larger by the number of repetitions of the unit notification state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature G2. The notification control means executes an execution determination means (a third specific effect lottery process or a fourth specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) that determines execution of executing the specific notification in each game in the unit notification state. The specific notification is performed when the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is a response result corresponding to the execution of the specific notification.
The probability that the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means will be the corresponding result is set so that the first advantageous state is higher than the second advantageous state, so that the identification is performed in the unit notification state. The feature G1 is characterized in that when the notification is executed, the average number of executed games executed in the unit notification state is larger in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, an excellent effect of the feature G1 can be expected only by changing the winning probability of the execution determination of the specific notification.

Feature G3. The execution determination means has a configuration in which the execution determination is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the probability that the result of the execution determination in the first advantageous state becomes the corresponding result is the probability that the result of the execution determination in the second advantageous state is the corresponding result. The gaming machine according to feature G2, which is characterized in that it is set to be higher than the probability of becoming.

According to the above configuration, the execution judgment is made according to the lottery result of each game, and it is possible to give the impression that the presence or absence of execution of the specific notification depends on one's luck. Attention to the result is preferably increased.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state have a common probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the specific notification can be higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state without differentiating the probability that the lottery result of each game will be the specific result. Therefore, as a result, the average number of executed games in the unit notification state can be made larger in the second advantageous state, and the excellent playability of the feature G1 is realized with a relatively simple configuration. It becomes possible.

Feature G5. The average number of repetitions of the unit notification state is set to be larger in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state, according to any one of features G1 to G4. Game machine.

In the above configuration, the average number of executed games in the unit notification state is likely to be smaller in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and the number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state is relatively the number of continuous games. In the configuration that can be increased, the average number of repetitions of the actual unit notification state is set to be larger in the second advantageous state, and the average number of executed games in the unit notification state is set to be larger. The difference will not be enough to reverse the number of iterations. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the difference in the average number of executed games in the unit notification state from being too large to give the impression of a so-called finished race.

Feature G6. The average number of repetitions of the unit notification state is set to be smaller in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state, according to any one of features G1 to G5. Game machine.

In the above configuration, the average number of executed games in the unit notification state is likely to be smaller in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and the number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state is relatively the number of continuous games. In the configuration that can be increased, the average number of repetitions of the actual unit notification state is also set to be larger in the first advantageous state, and the difference in the average number of executed games in the unit notification state. Is a difference enough to reverse the number of repetitions. By doing so, by providing a difference in the average number of executed games in the unit notification state, even in the first advantageous state with a small number of continuous games, the effect of showing an advantage over the second advantageous state is maximized. It is possible to expect to the limit.

When the above configuration is applied to the feature G5, the types of advantageous states are increased, the combination of the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in the feature G5, and the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in the feature G6. It is advisable to make the combination with and different.

Specifically, for example, in ascending order of the average number of continuous games, the first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%), the second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 60%), and the third advantageous state. (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) is provided, and the average number of executed games in the unit notification state is likely to be the smallest in the first advantageous state and the largest in the third advantageous state. Then, the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state is made larger than the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state (feature G5), and the unit in the second advantageous state. By making the average number of repetitions of the notification state larger than the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state (feature G6), the configuration of the feature G5 and the configuration of the feature G6 are inconsistent. It becomes possible to prepare without.

Feature G7. In the advantageous state, a predetermined number (18 games) or more of games are set as one unit state, and if the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, the next unit is executed after the execution of the unit state. On the other hand, if the continuation condition is not satisfied while shifting to the state, the advantageous state ends after the execution of the unit state.
The second advantageous state is more likely to satisfy the continuation condition than the first advantageous state, and the second advantageous state is more likely to have more games than the first advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G6.

According to the above configuration, if a specific number of games are set as one unit state and the continuation condition is satisfied, the next unit state is entered, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the next unit state is not reached. In the set management type advantageous state, the continuation condition is more likely to be satisfied in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state, and the number of games is increased. In such a set management type advantageous state, the difference in advantage due to the difference in the number of sets is, of course, larger than the difference in the number of games. The impression of advantage / disadvantage with is also greatly different. Therefore, by applying the configuration of the feature G1 to the advantageous state of the set management type as described above, the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is larger than the difference in the number of repetitions in the actual unit state (difference in the number of sets). It becomes possible to make it smaller or smaller, and such an effect can be expected more preferably.

Feature G8. A game progress means (execution of normal processing by the main control device 101) for advancing the game with the game starting based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ending based on the predetermined end condition being satisfied as one game. Function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player in a game advanced by the game progress means, and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that grants a privilege to a player according to a lottery result by the lottery means and a result of a game advanced by the game progressing means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, an AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the number of games tends to be larger than that of the first advantageous state. And are set,
In the advantageous state, a special number (10 games) of games is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. When the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. It is equipped with a control means (a function of executing a process for performing a pseudo-set effect by the display control device 81).
When the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the average number of executed games executed in the unit notification state is set to be different between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the start operation by the player, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and the privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, a special number of games is set to one unit notification state, and when a specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. Then, the next unit notification state is started, and if a special number of games are executed without specific notification being performed in the unit notification state, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. Therefore, the player can grasp that the advantageous state continues as long as the unit notification state is repeated, and can expect that the specific notification is performed in the unit notification state.

As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the number of continuous games is different are set, and the unit notification state in the first advantageous state and the unit notification state in the second advantageous state are used for unit notification. When the specific notification is performed in the state, the average number of executed games as the number of staying games in the unit notification state is set to be different.

In this case, for example, if the number of staying games in the unit notification state is likely to increase in the second advantageous state in which the number of continuous games tends to be longer than in the first advantageous state, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are assumed. When the same number of games is continued, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state tends to be larger in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. Then, even if the second advantageous state continues for a longer time than the first advantageous state, the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is the difference in the number of continuous games between the second advantageous state and the first advantageous state. It is possible to make it look smaller than the difference. Further, for example, if the number of staying games in the unit notification state tends to decrease in the second advantageous state in which the number of continuous games tends to be longer than in the first advantageous state, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are assumed to be the same. When the number of games is continued, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state tends to be larger in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state appear to be larger than the difference in the number of continuous games between the second advantageous state and the first advantageous state.

As described above, according to the above configuration, the difference in the number of games in each advantageous state can be made to appear larger or smaller depending on the number of repetitions of the unit notification state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The invention described in the above features G1 to G8 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. When the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features G1 to G8, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10, and a part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A game progress means (execution of normal processing by the main control device 101) for advancing the game with the game starting based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ending based on the predetermined end condition being satisfied as one game. Function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player in a game advanced by the game progress means, and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that grants a privilege to a player according to a lottery result by the lottery means and a result of a game advanced by the game progressing means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
In the advantageous state, a predetermined number (18 games) of games are set as one unit state, and if the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, the next unit state is executed after the execution of the unit state. On the other hand, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed.
In the advantageous state, a first notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a first notification (pseudo set effect) over a plurality of games, and
In the advantageous state, a second notification means (display control device) capable of executing a second notification (for example, an opening effect, an ending effect, or a jackpot effect) over a plurality of games so as to be continuous before or after the first notification. (Function to execute processing for performing opening effect, ending effect and jackpot effect by 81) and
With
When the number of games in which the first notification is performed by the first notification means and the number of games in which the second notification is performed by the second notification means are equal to or more than the specific number and less than the specific number. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set to be in some cases.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the start operation by the player, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and the privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player is a so-called set management type state in which a specific number or more of games are set as a unit state and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. Has been done.

In such a configuration, the first notification and the second notification are performed during the unit state, and when the number of games of the first notification and the second notification are combined, the number of games in the unit state is specified. There are cases where the number is more than the number and cases where the number is less than the specific number. By doing so, even if the number of games in the unit state is not changed from a specific number, it becomes possible for the production side to make it appear as if the number of games in the unit state is becoming longer or shorter. It is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state of the set management type without using complicated processing.

Feature H2. The first notification means executes the first notification with a number of games smaller than the specific number.
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the second notification means executes the second notification with a number of games smaller than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the number of games does not exceed a specific number with only one notification, and it is possible to give the impression that the set of both notifications corresponds to one unit state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably enhance the effect of making the length of the unit state change by both notifications.

Feature H3. The first notification means can execute the first notification over a first number of games, and can execute the first notification over a second number of games different from the first number.
The second notification means can execute the second notification over a third number of games, and can execute the second notification over a fourth number of games different from the third number. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2.

According to the above configuration, the number of games of the first notification and the second notification can be changed. By doing so, for example, in a configuration in which the second notification is performed after the first notification and one set of effects is performed, even if the first notification is shortened, the second notification is long. It is possible to raise expectations for continuation.

The above configuration does not exclude that the "first number" and the "third number" are the same number, and the "second number" and the "fourth number" are the same number. It does not exclude that.

Further, the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The first notification means can change the number of games for which the first notification is executed.
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, wherein the second notification means can change the number of games for which the second notification is executed. "

Feature H4. The first notification means executes the first notification up to a special number (10) of games.
When a predetermined specific notification is executed during the execution of the first notification by the first notification means, the first notification ends regardless of the number of remaining games of the first notification, and the second notification is completed. If the second notification by means is set to start and the specific notification is not executed over the special number of games, the advantageous state ends after the end of the first notification. The gaming machine according to the feature H3, which is characterized in that it is set as follows.

According to the above configuration, the first notification is configured to be performed over a special number of games, and if the specific notification is performed during that time, the second notification is performed, but the specific notification is performed during the specific notification. If not, the advantageous state will end. Therefore, the player wants to secure a large number of games for the first notification by performing the specific notification at the latest possible timing, and wants to confirm that the specific notification is performed at the earliest possible timing and the advantageous state does not end. It is possible to realize a game with a feeling of excitement by utilizing the desire for conflicting events.

Feature H5. The second notification by the second notification means is terminated in the game in which the remaining number of games in the advantageous state is the number obtained by adding 1 to the special number, and the second notification by the first notification means is started from the next game. 1 The gaming machine according to feature H4, characterized in that it includes means for starting notification (a function of executing a process of ending a jackpot effect in the eighth game of the final AT set by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably realize a gaming machine having the feature H4, in which the advantageous state ends when the first notification is executed without the specific notification being performed over a special number of games.

Feature H6. If the second notification by the second notification means is executed in the game before the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied is started, the number of remaining games in the unit state is 1 in the special number. The feature is that the second notification that has been executed is continued (a function of executing the processing of steps S3905 to S3908 by the display control device 81) until the number of games is the sum of the above. The gaming machine according to H4 or feature H5.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is not satisfied and the continuation condition is not satisfied as it is, the final unit state is reached. If the second notification is performed in the game before the update of the unit state, The second notification is continued until the number of remaining games in the unit state becomes the special number + 1. By doing so, the second notification is performed in the last unit state, and then the first notification is performed over a special number of games to end the advantageous state. Such a configuration can be realized only because the number of games of the second notification can be changed, and by doing so, the unit state becomes longer or shorter due to both notifications as in the feature H1. While it is possible to make an impression as if it were, it is possible to match the end of the unit state with the end of both notifications.

Feature H7. If the second notification by the second notification means is executed in the game before the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied is started, the number of remaining games in the unit state is 1 in the special number. When the number of continuous games of the second notification when the second notification that has been executed is continued up to the number of games obtained by adding the above is larger than the upper limit of the number of continuous games of the second notification, the said The feature H4 is characterized by including means for ending the second notification and starting the first notification by the first notification means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3909 to S3917 by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of H6.

According to the above configuration, when the continuation condition is not satisfied and the continuation condition is not satisfied as it is, the final unit state is reached, or when the second notification is performed in the game before the update of the unit state. If the number of games remaining in the unit state is continued until the number of games remaining in the unit state reaches the special number +1 and the maximum number of games of the second notification is reached, the second notification is terminated and the first notification is performed. To be By doing so, it is possible to avoid being aware that the last unit state has been reached through the length of the second notification being longer than usual.

Feature H8. The first notification by the first notification means and the second notification by the second notification means until the remaining number of games in the unit state for which the continuation condition is not satisfied becomes the number obtained by adding 1 to the special number. The gaming machine according to feature H7, which comprises means for causing a second notification (a function of executing steps S3617 to S3620, steps S3715 to S3718, etc. by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the second notification is terminated and the first notification is started at the time of updating the last unit state, the first notification is reached by the time the number of remaining games in the last unit state becomes the special number +1. And the second notification will be performed. Then, in the remaining special number of games, the first notification is performed again and the advantageous state ends. By doing so, it is possible to make an impression that the unit state becomes longer or shorter by both notifications as in the feature H1, but the end of the unit state and the end of both notifications are well matched. Is possible.

Feature H9. The first notification means can execute the first notification over a first number of games, and can execute the first notification over a second number of games different from the first number.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, wherein the second notification means executes the second notification over a third number of games.

According to the above configuration, the number of games of the first notification can be changed, while the number of games of the second notification does not change. By doing so, the effect of the feature H1 can be expected only by adjusting the number of games on the first notification side, and the configuration can be simplified.

The above configuration does not exclude that the "first number" and the "third number" are the same number, and the "second number" and the "third number" are the same number. It does not exclude that.

When the above configuration is applied to the features H3 to H8, for example, "the second notification means includes a specific second notification means and a predetermined second notification means, and the specific second notification means is the first. 2 The notification can be executed over the third number of games, and can be executed over the second number of games different from the fourth number, and the predetermined second notification means can perform the second notification. It may be limited to "execution over the third number of games".

Further, the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The first notification means can change the number of games for which the first notification is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, wherein the second notification means cannot change the number of games for which the second notification is executed. "

The invention described in the above features H1 to H9 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. When the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features H1 to H9, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10, and a part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. A game progress means (execution of normal processing by the main control device 101) for advancing the game with the game starting based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ending based on the predetermined end condition being satisfied as one game. Function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player in a game advanced by the game progress means, and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that grants a privilege to a player according to a lottery result by the lottery means and a result of a game advanced by the game progressing means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, an AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the number of games tends to be larger than that of the first advantageous state. And are set,
The advantageous state is configured so that a specific number (18 games) or more of games can be executed as a unit state (AT set), and if the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, after the execution of the unit state, after the execution of the unit state, While shifting to the next unit state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the execution of the unit state.
In the advantageous state, a special number (10 games) of games is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. When the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. It is equipped with a control means (a function of executing a process for performing a pseudo-set effect by the display control device 81).
The number of times (pseudo-set number) of the unit notification states executed in the unit state is set so that the number of times in the second advantageous state is likely to be smaller than that in the first advantageous state. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the start operation by the player, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and the privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, a specific number or more of games are set as a unit state, and the unit state is repeated as long as the continuation condition is satisfied, that is, a so-called set management type state. It is said that.

In such a configuration, a special number of games are set to one unit notification state during the advantageous state, and when a specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started. In addition, when a special number of games are executed without performing a specific notification in the unit notification state, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. Can grasp that the advantageous state continues as long as the unit notification state is repeated, and can expect that the specific notification is performed in the unit notification state.

As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the number of continuous games is different are set, and the unit notification state in these first advantageous states and the unit notification state in the second advantageous state are unit states. The number of unit notification states executed in is set so that the number of times in the second advantageous state is likely to be smaller than that in the first advantageous state.

In this case, if the unit state in which the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are executed the same number of times is repeatedly executed, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is likely to be larger in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. .. Then, even if the second advantageous state continues for a longer time than the first advantageous state and the number of repetitions of the unit state increases, the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is regarded as the second advantageous state. It is possible to make it look smaller than the difference in the number of continuous games from the first advantageous state.

By doing so, it is possible to make the difference in the number of games in each advantageous state appear larger depending on the number of repetitions of the unit notification state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature I2. The notification control means executes an execution determination means (a third specific effect lottery process or a fourth specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) that determines execution of executing the specific notification in each game in the unit notification state. The specific notification is performed when the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is a response result corresponding to the execution of the specific notification.
The execution is executed in the unit state by setting the probability that the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means becomes the corresponding result is higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the number of times (pseudo-set number) of the unit notification state is likely to be smaller in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, an excellent effect of the feature I1 can be expected only by changing the winning probability of the execution determination of the specific notification.

Feature I3. The execution determination means has a configuration in which the execution determination is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the probability that the result of the execution determination in the first advantageous state becomes the corresponding result is the probability that the result of the execution determination in the second advantageous state is the corresponding result. The gaming machine according to feature I2, characterized in that it is set to be higher than the probability of becoming.

According to the above configuration, the execution judgment is made according to the lottery result of each game, and it is possible to give the impression that the presence or absence of execution of the specific notification depends on one's luck. Attention to the result is preferably increased.

Feature I4. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state have a common probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the specific notification can be higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state without differentiating the probability that the lottery result of each game will be the specific result. Therefore, as a result, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the unit state can be made larger in the first advantageous state, and the excellent playability of the feature I1 can be realized with a relatively simple configuration. Is possible.

Feature I5. The total number of times of the unit notification state in the advantageous state is set to be larger in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state, according to any one of features I1 to I4. The described gaming machine.

In the above configuration, the number of unit notification states in one unit state in which a specific number of games in the advantageous state is a unit is likely to be larger in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and the unit notification in the first advantageous state is likely to occur. In a configuration in which the number of states can be increased for the number of continuous games, the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state of the entire actual advantageous state is set to be larger in the second advantageous state. Therefore, the difference in the number of times of the unit notification state in the unit state is not a difference enough to reverse the total number of times of the unit notification state in the advantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the difference in the number of unit notification states from being too large to give the impression of a so-called finished race.

Feature I6. The total number of times of the unit notification state in the advantageous state is set to be smaller in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state, according to any one of features I1 to I5. Described gaming machine.

In the above configuration, the number of unit notification states in one unit state in which a specific number of games in the advantageous state is a unit is likely to be larger in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and the unit notification in the first advantageous state is likely to occur. In a configuration in which the number of states can be increased for the number of continuous games, the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state of the entire actual advantageous state is also set to be larger in the first advantageous state. Therefore, the difference in the number of times of the unit notification state in the unit state is such a difference that the total number of times of the unit notification state in the advantageous state is reversed. By doing so, it is possible to maximize the effect of producing an effect that is more advantageous than the second advantageous state even in the first advantageous state with a small number of continuous games.

When the above configuration is applied to the feature I5, the types of advantageous states are increased, the combination of the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in the feature I5, and the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in the feature I6. It is advisable to make the combination with and different.

Specifically, for example, in ascending order of the average number of continuous games, the first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%), the second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 60%), and the third advantageous state. (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) is provided, and the number of unit notification states in the unit state is likely to be the largest in the first advantageous state and the smallest in the third advantageous state. Then, the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state is made larger than the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state (feature I5), and the unit in the second advantageous state. By making the total number of repetitions of the notification state larger than the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state (feature I6), the configuration of the feature I5 and the configuration of the feature I6 are inconsistent. It becomes possible to prepare without.

The invention described in the above features I1 to I6 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. When the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features I1 to I6, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10, and a part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. A game progress means (execution of normal processing by the main control device 101) for advancing the game with the game starting based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ending based on the predetermined end condition being satisfied as one game. Function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player in a game advanced by the game progress means, and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that grants a privilege to a player according to a lottery result by the lottery means and a result of a game advanced by the game progressing means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, an AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the number of games tends to be larger than that of the first advantageous state. And are set,
The advantageous state is configured so that a specific number (18 games) or more of games can be executed as a unit state (AT set), and if the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, after the execution of the unit state, after the execution of the unit state, While shifting to the next unit state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the execution of the unit state.
In the advantageous state, a special number (10 games) of games is set to one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when the continuation condition of the unit notification state is satisfied, the game shifts to the next unit notification state. , A notification control means (a function of executing a process for performing a pseudo-set effect by the display control device 81) that does not shift to the next unit notification state when the continuation condition is not satisfied is provided.
The notification control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the unit notification state can be executed across the unit state and the unit state.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the start operation by the player, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and the privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, a specific number or more of games are set as a unit state, and the unit state is repeated as long as the continuation condition is satisfied, that is, a so-called set management type state. It is said that.

In such a configuration, a set management type notification in which a special number of games is set as one unit notification state during the advantageous state is also performed, and a unit is straddled between the unit state and the unit state in the advantageous state. The notification state can be executed. By doing so, it is allowed that the repetition of the unit state and the repetition of the unit notification state are not synchronized, and the success or failure of the continuation condition of the unit notification state is not so affected by the success or failure of the continuation condition of the unit state. It can be set relatively freely. Therefore, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of repetitions of the unit notification state more or less than the number of repetitions of the actual unit state, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of the game.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the specific number is a number different from a number that is an integral multiple of the special number, and the special number is a number different from a number that is an integral multiple of the special number.

As in the above configuration, the unit state and the unit notification state can be changed by preventing the number of games that are the repeating unit of the unit state and the number of games that are the repeating unit of the unit notification state from having an integral multiple relationship. It becomes difficult to synchronize. Therefore, the unit notification state can be easily executed across the unit state and the unit state, and the effect of the feature J1 can be more clearly exhibited.

Features J3. The notification control means terminates the unit notification state and starts the next unit notification state, assuming that the predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state and the continuation condition of the unit notification state is satisfied. On the other hand, when the special number of games is executed without performing the specific notification, the continuation condition of the unit notification state is not satisfied, and the next unit notification state is started after the end of the unit notification state. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, which is characterized in that it does not have a configuration.

According to the above configuration, the unit notification state may be updated by the specific notification without executing the special number of games, and the number of games in the unit notification state may change with the special number as the maximum number. become. By doing so, in executing the unit notification state across the unit state and the unit state, the update of the unit state and the update of the unit notification state may be synchronized, or the unit state and the unit notification state may be synchronized. It is possible to manage the fact that and may not be synchronized relatively freely depending on whether or not the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, and the effect of the feature J1 can be achieved with a simple configuration.

Features J4. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the first execution determination means (third identification by the display control device 81) that determines the execution of the specific notification regardless of the number of remaining games in the unit state. Equipped with a function to execute production lottery processing, etc.)
The game according to feature J3, wherein the notification control means executes the specific notification when the result of the execution determination by the first execution determination means is a result corresponding to the execution of the specific notification. Machine.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the unit notification state is updated by the specific notification, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the execution determination of the specific notification is performed regardless of the number of remaining games in the unit state. By doing so, the degree of freedom of the game in which the specific notification is executed is greatly improved, and the unit notification state is often executed across the unit states. Therefore, the effect of the feature J1 can be more preferably performed.

Feature J5. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, a second execution determination means (sub-side continuation by the display control device 81) that determines execution of executing the specific notification according to the number of remaining games in the unit state. It has a function to execute the third specific effect etc. in the first game of the AT set where the flag is not set).
The notification control means has the feature J3 or the feature J4 characterized in that the specific notification is executed when the result of the execution determination by the second execution determination means is the result corresponding to the execution of the specific notification. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the unit notification state is updated by the specific notification, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, the execution determination of the specific notification is performed according to the number of remaining games in the unit state. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for an event such as the unit notification state to continue even though the unit state ends and the advantageous state ends, and the reliability of the unit notification state becomes reliable. Can be secured.

Features J6. The game according to feature J5, wherein the second execution determination means performs the execution determination so that the specific notification is performed in a game in which the number of remaining games in the unit state is equal to or greater than the special number. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature J5 can be more preferably performed.

Feature J7. When the continuation condition of the unit notification state is satisfied, the notification control means terminates the unit notification state so that the special notification is executed over a predetermined second special number of games. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, characterized in that the next unit notification state is started after the execution of the special notification.

According to the above configuration, a game in which special notification is performed is interposed between the unit notification state and the unit notification state. As the special notification, for example, a jackpot effect that congratulates the establishment of the continuation condition of the unit notification state can be considered. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect when the continuation condition of the unit notification state is satisfied, and it is assumed that the specific number is the number of continuous games in the unit state and the number of continuous games in the unit notification state. Even if the number of special numbers is the same, or even if the update of the unit state and the unit notification state happens to be synchronized, the update will be shifted by the game that performs the special notification, and the unit state and the unit state will be straddled. As described above, the scene where the unit notification state is executed is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably play the effect of the feature J1 while enhancing the effect of the effect when the continuation condition of the unit notification state is satisfied.

Feature J8. The gaming machine according to feature J7, wherein the special notification can be executed so as to straddle the unit state and the unit state.

According to the above configuration, the special notification as a jackpot effect may also be executed across the unit states. By doing so, it is possible to update the unit notification state regardless of the game in which the unit state is updated, and it is possible to greatly improve the degree of freedom in producing the effect by the unit notification state. ..

Features J9. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, wherein the special number is smaller than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is likely to be larger than the number of repetitions of the unit notification state, and the number of continuous games in the actual advantageous state is utilized by utilizing the fact that the unit notification state is frequently updated. It is possible to give the impression that the advantageous state continues for a longer period of time. Further, by doing so, the unit notification state straddles the unit state and the unit state, and one unit notification state does not straddle a plurality of unit states. Therefore, the unit notification state is updated during at least one unit state, and the unit notification state is still a special number even though the advantageous state ends without satisfying the continuation condition of the unit state. It is possible to make it difficult for events such as not digesting the game to occur.

Features J10. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J9, wherein the continuation condition of the unit notification state is more likely to be satisfied than the continuation condition of the unit state in the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is larger than the number of repetitions of the unit state. By doing so, it is possible to give the impression that the game continues for a longer time than the actual number of continuous games in an advantageous state.

The invention described in the above features J1 to J10 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is started in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the reel is stopped. When the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features J1 to J10, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10, and a part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature H group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature H group described in detail above. It is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol changes start due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Slot machine as a game machine, 32 ... Reel as an orbiting body, 41 ... Start lever as a start operation means, 42 to 44 ... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64 ... Speakers constituting an auxiliary effect unit, 65 ... Auxiliary display unit constituting the auxiliary effect unit, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section indicator, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 ... A CPU that constitutes various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means.

Claims (7)

A game progressing means for advancing a game with the game starting based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ending based on a predetermined end condition as one game.
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player in a game progressed by the game progress means, and a lottery means for giving a privilege to the player.
A privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player according to a lottery result by the lottery means and a result of a game advanced by the game progress means, and a privilege giving means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
The advantageous state is configured so that a specific number or more of games can be executed as a unit state, and when the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, after the execution of the unit state, the game shifts to the next unit state. If the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed.
In the advantageous state, a special number of games less than the specific number is set as one unit notification state, and if the notification continuation condition of the unit notification state is satisfied, after the end of the unit notification state, the next On the other hand, if the continuation condition for notification is not satisfied, the notification control means that does not start the next unit notification state after the end of the unit notification state, and
When the continuation condition for notification in the unit notification state is satisfied, the specific notification means for executing the predetermined specific notification in the unit notification state and the specific notification means.
When the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit notification state. The means to make it possible and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific notification means includes a first means for executing the specific notification according to the number of remaining games in the unit state. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the first means executes the specific notification according to the number of remaining games in the unit state in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. The specific notification means is characterized in that, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the specific notification means includes a second means for executing the specific notification regardless of the number of remaining games in the unit state. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to 3. A plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the privilege given by the privilege giving means are set, and a setting value of one of the plurality of setting values is set. Equipped with means
When the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the specific notification means digests the special number of games in the unit notification state without performing the specific notification. After the unit notification state ends, the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state before the end unit notification state so that the number of end games until the end game in which the advantageous state ends tends to be the first number. When the set value set by the setting means is a second set value different from the first set value, the end game number is likely to be a second number different from the first number. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, further comprising a fourth means capable of executing the specific notification in the unit notification state before the unit notification state. As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the continuation condition of the unit state is more likely to be satisfied than the first advantageous state are set.
The fourth means is
In the first advantageous state, when the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the end unit notification state is set so that the end game number is likely to be the first number. When the specific notification is executed in the previous unit notification state and the set value set by the setting means is the second set value, the end game number is likely to be the second number. The specific notification is executed in the unit notification state before the end unit notification state, and the specific notification is executed.
In the second advantageous state, when the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the end unit notification state is set so that the end game number is likely to be the second number. When the specific notification is executed in the previous unit notification state and the set value set by the setting means is the second set value, the end game number is likely to be the first number. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the specific notification can be executed in the unit notification state before the end unit notification state. The specific notification means includes a second means for executing the specific notification in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, regardless of the number of remaining games in the unit state.
The second means includes an execution determination means for determining execution of executing the specific notification according to a lottery result by the lottery means in each game in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied. The specific notification is executed based on the determination result by the execution determination means.
6. The execution determination means is characterized in that the execution determination of the specific notification is performed so that the probability of the result of executing the specific notification differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. The gaming machine described in.

Images